Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

click . Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar.In the following illustration. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. In addition. In the steps that follow. This creates a new project based on the default template. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. By default. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. the user interface is labeled.

The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. On the left side of the Options Bar. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. While working in the drawing area. and View. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP For example. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. click Toolbar. notice a door type is specified. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. and click. Then. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. To choose commands. click the command name to start the command. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. place the cursor over the menu name.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. Within the drawing area. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. You use the Type Selector in two ways. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. notice the list of walls that are available. if you intend to add a door. If you select the Door tool. For example. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. First. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. immediately below the Type Selector. Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

select Views (all). windows). Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. To access the commands within a tab. and group name. click the tab. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. 3D). Navigating the User Interface | 13 . and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. schedules. elevations. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. families. family category (doors. families. and rename views. delete. walls. reports. Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups. In the Project Browser. sheets. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

double-click the name. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The browser is dockable. After you create a browser organization scheme. click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil.■ ■ To open a view. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. Do not click. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. click Cancel. ■ 13 In the Type Selector.

click Modify. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. The Status Bar also provides information. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.In the bottom left corner of the window. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. in conjunction with Tooltips. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. In the Status Bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. 20 Press TAB. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. When you place the cursor over a component. regarding selected components within a view. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. In this case. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. 18 On the Design Bar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts.

and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. click Training Files.rvt. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. For example. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. Click the Help button. click . There are several tools that help you find information. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. find a keyword on the Index tab. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Windows: From any window. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. You can select a topic on the Contents tab.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can use this tri-pane. If there is no Help button displayed. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Toolbar: From the Toolbar.

8 Click in the drawing area.The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 6 On the View toolbar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.

Cnst. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. When drawing or modifying a building model. and double-click 2nd Flr. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. bottoms. These are the drag controls. and select the wall. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Small blue dots. Similar controls. click Zoom. press and hold CTRL. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. roll the wheel to zoom the view. click . Without clicking in the dialog. expand Floor Plans. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. on the View toolbar. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. display along the ends. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. If you do not have a wheel mouse. expand Views (all). 14 Enter ZR. On a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. To modify or add snap increments. and drag the cursor. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). referred to as shape handles. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog.

18 Select the Craftsman02 table.15 Click and drag the left control. and on the Edit toolbar. require two clicks to complete the command. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Some commands. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. click (Move). Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . In this case. After selecting the element to be moved. click to specify the starting position. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy. to lengthen the wall.

In this example. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar.20 Click next to the lower wall. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 23 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click the drop-down menu next to . as shown. select the second item in the list. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and drag it on top of the table. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Select the plant.

such as the Lines command. on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 To end the command. click Lines. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. On the Design Bar. click Modify. Press ESC twice. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 . Some commands. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. methodology. you design a mechanical system for an office building. 23 . you can choose to save your work.autodesk. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you create the mechanical system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you will understand the process. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. By following the recommended workflow. However. go to http://www. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. After finishing each exercise.

11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. click New.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog. Creating Zones In this exercise. click New. you create a shared project parameter. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. under Groups. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Next. and click OK 3 times. First. and name the new parameter group Rooms. and click OK. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Rename. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. Later in the design process. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you create separate views in which to work with zones. select Rooms. 10 Under Parameters. click Create. you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements. planning is critical to a successful design. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). 8 In the Save As dialog. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. and click OK. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. right-click Copy of 2 .Mech. In this lesson. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. and click Save. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. right-click the view named 2 . navigate to the folder of your choice. Open the m Zones.Mech Zones for Name. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. however. 3 Enter 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Select. click the Training Files icon.Mech. click Add. and click OK twice. click Yes. A new view called Copy of 2 . under Categories. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Office for File name. and double-click Level 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. After you create these views.

you would have needed to manually align the selection. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. and click OK. In this case. Creating Zones | 25 .Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. 15 In the Filter box. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). 14 On the Options Bar.Mech Zones to make it the active view. click to filter the selected elements. All level 2 room tags are selected. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. under Mechanical. double-click 2 . only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. click Check None. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. and then select Room Tags. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. 17 In the Project Browser. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned.

select the Office 6 room component. Then. and click (Properties). 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. enter zone 1 for Zone. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. press Ctrl. select the first room component. You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. and click OK.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and select each additional room component.Mech Zones view. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room. To clear a selection. use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). under Other. Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28.

23 In the 1 . you can choose to save your work. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 .Mech Zones. NOTE After finishing each exercise. and click Save. you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. Open the m Zones Color Scheme. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Using this project parameter. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 .Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . 25 In the Save As dialog. However. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. Office 16 Office 14. In this exercise. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17.Mech Zones view. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10.Mech and name it 1 . enter Zones Training for File name. You then copied room tags into the new views.Mech Zones view. and created a shared project parameter. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. In the next exercise. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties.

Next. TIP You can also right-click. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click OK. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. and click to place the legend. 8 Click OK twice. enter HVAC. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click (Properties). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. Verify that By value is selected. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the Type Selector. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select Zone. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. under Scheme Definition. and double-click 2 . 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. click the Edit/New button. 7 For Name. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Color. 14 Click OK. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter.Mech Zones to make it the active view. select Number for Color Scheme. and click Zoom to Fit. and click Drafting.

16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. 22 In the Color dialog. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. 19 In the drawing area.The modified color scheme displays. click Edit Color Scheme.Mech Zones view. under Basic Colors. 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 . 20 On the Options Bar. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. and click the associated color. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 1 . 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility.Mech Zones to make it the active view. click Color Scheme Legend. and click OK twice. This is because color schemes are view specific. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22). Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. click the color scheme legend. and click OK. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. Next. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). select Number for Color Scheme. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned.

and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. During an energy analysis. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. click Heating and Cooling Loads. 23 If you want to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. and click Mechanical. 24 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. and do the following: ■ For Building Type. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. verify that Office is selected. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Energy Analysis. verify that Compute room volumes is selected.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. click Compute room volumes. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise.

View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Single Duct is selected. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. notice that the rooms in the building display.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. under Energy Analysis. verify that Boston. verify that <Building> is selected. Rooms are then listed for the selected level. Then.■ For Building Construction. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. 8 Select 16 Office. Next. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . click Edit for Energy Data. You have verified the building information. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. you need to view specific rooms. Next. you view various rooms in the building. 9 Click (Highlight). verify that VAV . click the Rooms tab. 7 Select Level 1 for Level. MA is selected. ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). For Place and Location.

12 On the View Selector. If you select Shading. Next. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. 10 With the Highlight tool active. the rooms display in blue. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them. You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. you isolate a room. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. 14 Click (Isolate). 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.The Office 16 highlights in red. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue. 13 Select Level 2 for Level. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. pan. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. NOTE Using the View Selector. and then select 25 Lounge. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model.

Now that the building and room information has been verified. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 With the Isolate tool active. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. Next. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. and clicking Element Properties.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. After the energy analysis is completed. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. or room service values. TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). 19 Using the methods that you learned. these values on the Room tab will be blank. and Room Service. you verify room information. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. select Office 3 on Level 1. Room Construction. right-clicking. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. and the Loads Report Summary displays. you can perform an energy analysis. or import the IES model that has already been created. room construction.

NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. sizing ductwork. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 23 In the Save As dialog. modify air terminal parameters. you specified building and room information. click the Training Files icon. and validate your air system design. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and click Save. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Weather Data. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. In the next lesson. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. After completing the air systems lesson. click File menu ➤ Save. Select Level 1 for Underlay. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. including the Project Information. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). and Room Summary. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. Open the m Air Terminals. and click View Properties. and viewed room to verify room boundaries. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. adding AC units. As you place the air terminals. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. under Graphics. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. 22 If you want to save your work.21 Review the Loads Report Summary.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In this exercise. you create new views.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After system creation. Then. and double-click 1 . Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. You can also select the 1 . 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range.

NOTE When entering a value. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. the command in progress terminates. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . for the Level parameter.5 In the View Range dialog. for the Cut plane parameter. You can also press Esc to accomplish this. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. Placing Air Terminals | 35 . Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. Under View Depth. for the Top parameter. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. enter 0 for Offset. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected.Ceiling Mech is the active view. and enter 2615 mm for Offset.Round Connection : M_600x600 . and enter 2615 for Offset. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. 9 In the Type Selector.200 Neck. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. click Air Terminal. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. TIP When you click Modify. For example. You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. and press Tab. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. 6 Click OK twice. enter the value. click Modify.

and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. under Constraints. click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Thus. TIP To use the Move tool. enter 2600 for Offset. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. and click OK. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. and then click .13 On the Options Bar. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. click to specify the move start point. enter 150 L/s for Flow. 17 In the drawing area. and after the mid point snap displays. 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Placing Air Terminals | 37 . and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. 19 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. then select Multiple. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.The air terminal is placed. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool.

Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. 22 In the Type Selector. click Air Terminal. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . listening dimensions display to aid placement.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method.

Placing Air Terminals | 39 . select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm). 24 In the Type Selector. place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them.Before you move the exhaust grill.

clear the UpFlowArrow check box. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. click Modify. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. click on the Edit toolbar. and click Element Properties. under Mechanical. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. and click OK.

Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.Ceiling Mech the active view. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. 33 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save. Placing Air Terminals | 41 . Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers. 34 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. In the Element Properties dialog. You will be using different views to design the systems. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1.After you place the supply air terminals. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. navigate to the folder of your choice.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. specify the same view parameters as 1 .

In the next exercise. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Flow. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. In the next exercise. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Open the m Air System Schedules. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In this exercise. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. More importantly. and learned a method for precise placement. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. modified the air terminal parameters. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Click OK. click the Training Files icon. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. select Room. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. 5 While pressing Ctrl. you create the air systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. do the following: ■ Under Category. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. under Available fields. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Select available fields from. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. select Air Terminals.In this exercise.

■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog. Verify that Formula is selected. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . and Itemize every instance is selected. 10 Click OK. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. select Check Supply Airflow. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. and click Conditional Format. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. in the Fields list. Select Blank line. Verify that Ascending is selected. and Totals only. Select Footer.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Click OK. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. Select HVAC for Discipline. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. Select Air Flow for Type. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Select Between for Test. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. Click OK twice. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. select the field and click Remove.

under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. and maximize the 1 . This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 16 Enter ZR. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. After you modify the airflow parameters. NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Next. NOTE If a different project is also open. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. 18 In the schedule. 15 In the Project Browser. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green. the selected air terminal displays in red. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and press Tab. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. 21 Close the schedule view. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing.Mech floor plan view. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.Mech to make it the active view. double-click 1 . 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. you are changing the air terminal connector size. This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view.

they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click Edit for View Range. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . This is the power of BIM. click File menu ➤ Save. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK twice. and click Save. Under Primary Range.22 If you want to save your work. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. enter an Offset value of 3000. In this exercise. 23 In the Save As dialog. click in the drawing area to make it active. and then create the logical connection between the system components. If the System Browser does not respond. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike logical connections. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. under Extents. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. During this exercise. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. you create air systems. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 1 . then press F9.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech to make it the active view. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the View Range dialog. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. click System Browser. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Mech view. After creating the logical connection. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. and click View Properties. for the Top parameter. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 .

So.200mm Inlet. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. and press Esc twice. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You will learn more about systems in this exercise. 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. air terminals. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. if all system components are assigned. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Thus. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. If desired. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. click Mechanical Equipment. As you assign diffusers to systems. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter ZR. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click to place the VAV box. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . after you placed the diffusers. For now. 10 In the Type Selector.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.

and cleared from the Options Bar. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. Next. enter 2900 for Offset. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. 16 On the Options Bar. click (Create Supply Air System).Airflow. Under Mechanical . 15 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . and select the VAV box. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. select an air terminal that you added to the system. Click OK. you add the VAV to this system. click (Select Equipment for System). system specific tools display on the Options Bar. You created a system that includes the air terminal. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. and click Element Properties.

and select the system. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. and select solution 2. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. ■ Click (Next Solution). TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 20 On the Options Bar. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. 18 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the new system is selected. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). and click Select to select the system. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. The organization is from upstream. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. Notice that Solutions is selected. They remain assign to their respective default systems. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. select Main.

25 Click OK. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Medium for Detail Level. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . For example. select Branch. Enter 2900mm for Offset. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. For more information. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. as was the elbow itself. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. click Finish Layout. The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. For example. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.Round for Flex Duct Type. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. thus it is not part of the system. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. Enter 2900 for Offset. refer to Help.

and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. Do not highlight or select the VAV box.65 Pa/m. The first time you press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and press Tab twice. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 30 On the Options Bar. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. click Sizing. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. then you know that a disconnection exists. and enter . select Coarse detail level for single line. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Rerouting usually correct this issue. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Verify that Only is selected. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. Click OK. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. under Sizing Method. and click to select them. Under Constraints. and equipment. On the View Control Bar. fittings. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation.

double-click the second VAV box listed. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. enter ZR. IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 . IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. 36 In the left column of the System Browser. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 .The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. click Mechanical Equipment. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. click to place the VAV box. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3).200mm Inlet.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. 34 In the Type Selector.

TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. system equipment. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. The component highlights in the drawing area. under Constraints. click Add To System. enter 2900mm for Offset. NOTE After you select a system component. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the active being edited. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. and click Select from the context menu. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. right-click. 40 Click (Edit System). The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. right-click the component in the left column. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This system includes the selected system component(s). 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. If not. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. a new system is immediately created.

47 Select the VAV box. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4.43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2. On the Options Bar. click Select Equipment. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. click Finish System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 . On the Options Bar. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.

a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The system displays in red. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar.If you leave the mouse stationary. and select solution 3. 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. click Layout Path. 52 On the Options Bar. 50 Click to select the system.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. This was the reason for the warning message.

or modify the duct manually. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 61 On the Options Bar. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. You can either relocate the VAV box. and after the end point snap displays. Verify that Only is selected. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. and click to select them. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. you can review it and take action if necessary. and enter . If a warning occurs. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. click Duct Fitting. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Under Constraints. under Sizing Method. click to place the endcap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 57 In the Type Selector. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. click Sizing. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. So. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct.65 Pa/m.

and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Next. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. The VAV box. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. air terminals.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . However. and press Tab twice. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it.

65 In the 1 . 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the VAV box. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 .200mm Inlet. 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment.Mech view. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 68 In the Type Selector. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals.

and the red system display cleared. 75 On the Options Bar. The selected diffusers highlight in red. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. click . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. click . 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. and click OK. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. You will add this later. 74 On the Options Bar. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. Then. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. 73 While pressing CTRL. click . This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. The new supply air system displays in red. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. under Constraints. and press TAB once to highlight the system.71 Select the VAV. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click to select the system. and on the Options Bar. enter 2900 for Offset. and enter 825 for AirFlow.

78 On the Options Bar. ■ Click . 80 In the drawing area. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. click Modify. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You have logically connected the air system components. Next. and select solution 3. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. select the left section of the main. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

notice that drag controls display. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. you need to modify the branch layout. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. Next. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown.After you select the main. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout.

Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. mechanical equipment. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. and click on the Options Bar. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. the branch path is too close to the diffuser.84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. click Add to System. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . A change has occurred in the air system design. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). The ductwork is created. Undo the layout. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. click Finish Layout. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. The system components are now physically connected. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar.

88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. the Number of Elements increased to 6. The new system component is now part of the same system. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. and working from the end of the main. select the transition. elbow. Next. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. duct segment. Then. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. and the other duct segment. 91 While pressing CTRL. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . VAV.Notice that on the Options Bar. click Finish System. 92 Right-click. select a system component that is already part of a system. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. This verifies the added diffuser. and click Delete on the context menu.

96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. select the transition fitting. However. continue using the Layout Path tool. 93 Zoom the view.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. and locate the top connector. At this point. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. 97 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 95 Zoom out the view. you can right-click the connector. then you are dragging the lower connector. You will draw duct in the next exercise. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar.

click to place the endcap. The new ductwork is created. and after the end point snap displays. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 101 In the Type Selector. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 . click Duct Fitting. click Finish Layout.■ Click . Due to the takeoff based duct type. and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Ignore the warning message. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. This caused the warning message to display.

TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and press Tab twice. 106 Under Mechanical . Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and click to select them. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct.Airflow. change the airflow to 990 L/s. You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. and click Element Properties from the context menu. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement.

65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.65 Pa/m. under Sizing Method. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. specify the air terminal airflow. ■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . 108 On the Options Bar. Click OK. under Mechanical.The selection displays in red. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. and enter .Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Under Constraints. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. For VAV airflow. double-click 1 . you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset.

68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution.Mech mechanical floor plan view. see the note below. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. You can either relocate the VAV box. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . Next. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. Do not change the duct conversion settings. If you receive errors. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. So. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below.65 Pa/m and select Only. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. If you receive errors. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. Verify that all Other options are cleared. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. modify the layout. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . or reinsert duct fittings. see the note below. modify the duct manually. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 .

Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. 115 In the Save As dialog. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Although you already checked duct connectivity. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components.65 Pa/m and select Only. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.■ For VAV airflow. and validated the systems in the System Browser. see the note above. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. and click Save. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. specify the air terminal airflow. In the next exercise. After creating each system. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. sized the ductwork. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. Do not change the duct conversion settings. navigate to the folder of your choice. see the note above. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. If you receive errors. If you receive errors. checked duct connectivity. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. You also specified VAV airflow. click File menu ➤ Save. 114 If you want to save your work. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Size the duct using the Friction method at . In this exercise. Verify that all Other options are cleared.

Adding a section view is a 2-click process.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Zoom to Fit. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. The section relocates under HVAC. enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. The first click specifies the section head. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1 . and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. and 5. right-click Section 1. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. under Graphics. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 4. and the second click specifies the section tail. Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Section. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). After you add the section.Mech to make it the active view. and click Properties.

The section head displays in blue. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. click Modify. The selected section displays in red. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5. select Medium for Detail Level. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. 10 On the Design Bar.8 In the drawing area. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. click the section. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right.

17 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. select Section Box. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. under Extents. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. Notice that in the 3D Mech view. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. click Modify. and click View Properties. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. and click OK. A section box displays around the building model. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. 21 In the drawing area. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 18 On the View Control Bar. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them.

27 If you want to save your work. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. and click Save. use the Zoom. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. 4. 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. Scroll. click (Dynamically Modify View). 28 In the Save As dialog. 24 On the View toolbar. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3. click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. In the next exercise. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. navigate to the folder of your choice.

you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. Enter 2900 for Offset. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. Verify that Angle is cleared. and double-click 1 . 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the start point. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. do the following.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. 2 Enter ZR. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duct. select Round Duct : Taps. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech to make it the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts.

enter 11000. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment. and after the listening dimensions appear. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment. and click to specify the end point.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. 10 Now. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right.

click to specify the start point. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. it may not clear the wall. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. If the duct does not clear the wall. after the connector snap displays. move the cursor to the right. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. enter 3000. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. Next. and after the listening dimensions appear. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. Then. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. press Tab. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. and select the duct (duct displays in red). 11 Finally. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . place the cursor over the duct.

If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. When drawing duct. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. If you pause briefly. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. TIP When drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. and press Enter to specify the end point. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. and click to specify the end point. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct.

zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. After you click to specify the end point. the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. 19 With the Draw tool open.18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct.

and click Draw Duct from the context menu. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. However. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. 26 In the Type Selector. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. 25 Right-click. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . On the View Control Bar. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. and after the connector snap displays. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. click to specify the start point. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. or width and height. the duct diameter. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary.

31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary.28 Press Esc. zoom the view to the right of the primary. 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. and Angle is cleared. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. and verify that Auto Connect is selected.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. On the Options Bar. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . you will do that in a later exercise. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. Finally. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Do not size the primary. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. specify a 2900mm offset. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. You will size the primary in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. Check connectivity. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV.

You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. and double-click 2 . Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. You will size the primary in a later exercise. On the Options Bar. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. specify a 2900mm offset.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. Do not size the primary. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and verify that Auto Connect is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser. Check connectivity. and Angle is cleared.Mech to make it the active view.

enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. In this exercise. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 38 If you want to save your work.Mech to make it the active view.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions. While drawing duct. In the next exercise. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Save As dialog. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. and double-click 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

and click to select the primary and its fittings. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. press Tab once. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Finish. 6 Select Solution 1. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The selected primary duct run displays in red. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict. However.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. click Routing Solutions.

8 Right-click. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 Select the VAV box. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 .The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. 11 Place the cursor over the primary. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. and click to specify the end point. and press TAB twice. you check connectivity. Next.

86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. and click Save. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 16 If you want to save your work. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. click File menu ➤ Save. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. navigate to the folder of your choice. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned.Mech to make it the active view. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts. The routing solution and connection are shown below. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. However. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. In this exercise. After resolving the conflicts. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. Open the m Duct Sizing . 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. This determines the airflow direction.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Velocity. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name. 15 Using the process that you just learned. Before sizing the primary. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. and double-click 2 . select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. then connect the VAV to the primary. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. 17 In the Save As dialog.

select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and after the end point snap displays. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. right-click the Design Bar. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. and click Mechanical. 4 In the Type Selector. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. click to place the endcap.Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 1 . NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and click to select it. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run.

Under Constraints. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 9 On the Options Bar. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. click Sizing. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Click OK.The selected primary displays in red. under Sizing Method.5 m/s. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and enter 12.

The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. Next. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. modify the layout. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. So. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. You can either relocate the VAV box. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. or reinsert duct fittings. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. 13 Using the process that you just learned. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. modify the duct manually. and press TAB twice. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 .The sized left primary is shown below.

place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Using the method you have learned. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.Mech to make it the active view. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser.The sized right primary is shown below. As in level 1. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and double-click 2 . 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.

and click Rename. right-click 1 Mech. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. enter 1 . you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Save. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. right-click the Design Bar. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. 20 In the Save As dialog. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project.Velocity Training for File name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Mechanical. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 . click File menu ➤ Save. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. and click to place the legend.Mech. Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Then. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. enter Duct Sizing .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech is created and becomes the active view.19 If you want to save your work. you sized the primary duct for the building. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. right-click Copy of 1 . Like room color scheme. In this exercise. First. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon.

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. In the Color column. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area. click in the second row. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. delete the existing text. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. Select By range. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. and enter high velocity for the second row. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. and on the Options Bar. and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved.5 m/s. and enter 7. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Caption column. In the Color column. click Edit Color Scheme. and click OK. and enter low velocity for the first row.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. you change the color scheme. Next. In the At Least column.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. and click OK.Mech is created and becomes the active view. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. right-click 2 Mech. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 19 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. enter 2 . right-click Copy of 2 .The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place the legend. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Rename. 12 In the Project Browser. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct.Mech. navigate to the folder of your choice. 18 If you want to save your work. 15 In the Type Selector. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements.Equal Friction. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number. and click Show. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. 2 In the System Browser. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. click the Training Files icon. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. click Close to deactivate the Show tool. 3 Right-click Supply Air. and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. expand the Mechanical systems folder.In this exercise. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.Mech to make it the active view. In the next exercise. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. To accomplish this. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. such as a VAV box and diffusers. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. click in the drawing area to make it active. If the System Browser does not respond. not ductwork (physical connections). and double-click 1 . First. Finally. Open the m Duct Sizing . In this exercise. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP If the System Browser is closed. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. then press F9.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select them. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. Note that the VAV box is not selected. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. click (Split). TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. 9 With the Split tool open.

transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes.65 Pa/m. click Tag ➤ By Category. and enter . and click Cancel. 16 In the Tags dialog.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. for Ducts. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. Next. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. under Sizing Method. Click OK. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. Under Constraints. ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. under Category. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. Clear Leader. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .12 On the Options Bar. ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. Notice that as the airflow decreases. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. click Sizing. Click Tags. and click to place each tag. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.

and double-click 2 . and click Save. First. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. 20 If you want to save your work. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. navigate to the folder of your choice. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 1 In the Project Browser. pressure. In the next exercise.Equal Friction Training for File name. Finally. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. In this exercise. 21 In the Save As dialog. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. click File menu ➤ Save. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. Using this tool.TIP To reposition a tag.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. select the tag and drag it to a new location. enter Duct Sizing . 2 Right-click in the view.Mech to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise.

click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser.You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. pressure. click Inspect. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. and click Inspect from the context menu. select any duct segment. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . A tooltip also displays the system information. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar. duct fitting. diffuser. IMPORTANT To select a system. After the System Inspector opens. Right-click a system from the System Browser. select (Inspect). 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. also known as the critical path. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. These are not logically connected to this system. Next. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.

under Graphics. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. and pressure information for various systems in the project. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click File menu ➤ Save. and click View Properties. 6 Click OK. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). In the next exercise. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. airflow. click the Training Files icon. 17 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. In this exercise. select Mechanical for Discipline. right-click Copy of Roof. In a later exercise. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. Open the m Placing AC Units. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. navigate to the folder of your choice. 16 If you want to save your work.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. you place 2 AC units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. For example. You also compared system information across a system. The primary is physically but not logically connected. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. and click OK. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. and click Rename. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. and click Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline.

You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room.This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. click Mechanical Equipment. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. enter ZR. 12 Click to place the AC unit. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 .25 Ton . 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view.

you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. right-click Section 2.Next. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). click Section. 16 Move the cursor to the right. and click to specify the section start point. under Graphics. click to specify the section end point. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box. 17 In the Project Browser. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. and click Properties. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

click Medium for Detail Level. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. 23 On the View Control Bar. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 21 On the Design Bar.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. 25 Select the AC unit. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. To place the AC unit on the roof surface. you must relocate it. click Modify.

25 Ton . (300mm directly above the start point). click to specify the move start point. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. Next.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only. click to specify the move end point. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. (Remember to select the reference edge first). and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . Use the Move tool. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. and after the end point snap displays. The AC unit placement is shown below. place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

First. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Then. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. In the next exercise. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. 2 Select the section box. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. 30 In the Save As dialog. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. and click Save. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. click the Training Files icon. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. click File menu ➤ Save.

Remember that. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. Note that if this option is unavailable. and drag the mouse to spin the model. If you like. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. if you do this. TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. 3 On the View toolbar. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. and while pressing the middle mouse button. Next.The entire building including the AC units display. click (Dynamically Modify View). Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. the active view is the only open window.

place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. the connector snap displays. and press Tab.6 In the Project Browser. click Duct. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. 10 In the Type Selector. This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Enter -750 for Offset. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 11 In the Roof Mech view. double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. TIP When tiling 2 views. under Mechanical. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. TIP When drawing duct. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 14 On the Options Bar. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. the active view is tiled to the left. and 500 for H: (height). Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 .

Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. and after listing dimensions display. 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm. 2900mm. If the 2 are different. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . connections are automatically created. 15 Move the cursor up.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar.

TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance.Mech view.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. but for this exercise you only need to see the riser.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. Notice that only the duct riser displays. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 .Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 . On the View Control Bar. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 . You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. You now switch to the 2 .Mech to make it the active view. 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. 18 Close the Roof Mech view. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 .

The selected items display in red. click to specify the start point. click Duct. verify that 2900 is specified. select Round Duct : Taps. 25 In the Type Selector. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. Verify that Auto connect is selected. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and while pressing CTRL. For Offset. select the adjoining elbow. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). select the horizontal primary segment.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. select 450. 22 In the 2 Mech view. 26 On the Options Bar.

click to specify the end point. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . The left primary is connected to the AC unit.28 Move the cursor over the primary. 29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. and after the centerline snap displays.

Next. and place the cursor over the end connector. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 32 In the 2 .Mech view. 112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 33 Select the right primary duct. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.

and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. However. click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. or by right-clicking a connector. if you use the Create Similar tool. click to specify the duct segment end point.34 Drag the connector to right. and after the connector snap displays. and after the centerline snap displays. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. 35 Select the primary duct. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary. click (Create Similar). This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. . 36 On the Edit toolbar. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector.

38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. 39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser. and click to specify the segment end point. 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser. and click to specify the end point. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. However. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.Mech view. You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit.41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool.

Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 46 In the Type Selector. click Duct Fitting. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 .The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. click to add the endcap. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork.Mech view. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. zoom in on the duct riser. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.

. click to add the endcap. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 49 In the Type Selector. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 .

You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify the duct riser endcap. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. Next.Mech view to make it active. 56 With the 2 views tiled. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. Create the high pressure supply air system. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. and then validate its geometry. 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner.A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. click in the 2 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 54 Using the 2 views. 53 In the 3D Mech view.

Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. click selected VAV boxes to it. 58 On the Options Bar.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. and click OK. 60 On the Options Bar. In this case. and then select Mechanical Equipment. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . 59 In the Filter dialog.Mech view range. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. and select the level 2 AC unit. click Check None. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view.

You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. expand Mechanical. Supply Air. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child).Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. all system components must be logically connected by a system. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. However. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. In the Unassigned folder. or even without ductwork. This is the system that you just created. 65 In the System Browser. 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. and click Select. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components.

and a 500mm height. Next. and enter 1050mm. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. and click Inspect. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. Next. duct fitting. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. The System Inspector tool opens. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. you inspect the system. Click the supply connector. 2900mm. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . diffuser. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. move the cursor down. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. click Inspect.Mech drawing area to make the view active. Specify the offset to -4400mm. click Inspect.

select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. open the 1 .Mech view (if open). and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the 1 .Mech view. Watch for the centerline snap as shown.This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view.

■ In the 1 . Instead of drawing duct. select the left primary duct segment. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. and remember to zoom the view. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 . Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. release the mouse button. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser.Mech view. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. and after the edge highlights.■ Connect the primary to the AC.

124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and inspect the system with the System Inspector. and validated these logical connections. Using tiled windows. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. you need to validate them. In this exercise. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. 79 In the Save As dialog. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. Validate the system using the System Browser. you check the systems in your project. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. navigate to the folder of your choice. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. In the next exercise. and for duct sizing. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. and quickly target those systems that need attention. In this exercise.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it.

you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. So. Open the m Checking Air Systems. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. Checking Air Systems | 125 . and for duct sizing. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. However. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. After you assign the system components to a system. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. as a tutorial exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. the duct is now associated with that system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. For example. click the Training Files icon. Then. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. click Check Duct Systems. thus assigning the components to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. As you view the warnings. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.

You have completed the supply air systems for the building. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. otherwise click Close. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You now confirm the systems that you created. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . placing a circulator pump. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. In this exercise. 6 Using the same methods. you create hydronic piping systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.The red lines represent the default logical connection. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. Depending on your air systems design. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. 8 Right-click Supply Air. and inspecting the piping system. click File menu ➤ Save. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. Then. and click Save. 9 Right-click a system. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. In the next lesson. 11 In the Save As dialog. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. 10 If you want to save your work. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this lesson. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.

Mech is created and becomes the active view. Creating Piping Views | 127 . verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. and click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Creating Piping Views In this exercise. clear Grids. 9 In the View Range dialog. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. and enter -3500mm for Offset. click the Annotation Categories tab. Under View Depth.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. For Bottom.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. 2 In the Project Browser. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. After completing the air systems lesson. right-click 2 Mech. and the systems to logically connect the system components. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and enter -3500 for Offset. right-click Copy of 2 . This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. 7 Click OK. you change the view range. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. scroll down to the Extents category. Open the m Creating Piping Views. click properties. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create new views in which to design the piping system. circulator pump.Mech. and click Edit for View Range. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. Next. First. pipes. for Level. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems.Piping for Name. A new view called Copy of 2 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and under Visibility. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. and enter 950mm for Offset. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. under Graphics. a boiler.

On the Filters tab. they will not filter all system elements needed. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. however. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. However. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. Also notice that 2 . You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. Considering this.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. and press Tab. 17 Under Categories. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . So. select Mechanical Equipment. For example. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. 14 Click Edit/New. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click OK. In this lesson. 10 Click OK twice. it will be best to create filters.NOTE When entering a value. (New). These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. 18 Under Filter Rules. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and enter VG. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems.Piping view. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 15 In the Filters dialog. click the Filters tab. click in the drawing area to make the view active. you can add and activate filters. the system filters are not used. just enter the value. you do not need to type measurement symbols. under Filters. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. The 2 . and verify that equals is selected.

23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. So. click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. click Edit / New. type name. system type. such as family name. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. . NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. Depending on the filter criteria. Click Apply. Next. click (Properties). click Air Terminals. click Air Terminal. Verify that none is selected for And. 22 Under Filter Rules. otherwise the filter will not work. and click OK twice. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. or even a description that you define. and verify that equals is selected. under Identity Data. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you must spell both verbatim. However. 19 In the Filters dialog. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. you need a define common filter criteria. 26 On the Options Bar. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. under Filters. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 In the Type Selector. you create a description as the common filter criteria. 29 Click Apply. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. 21 Under Categories. you may want to select each component type separately. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). To do this. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. Creating Piping Views | 129 . and click OK. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. This is the same rule for using formulae. return. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance).■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. select Description for Filter by. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. enter Air Terminal for Description. Next.

and select Round Duct for the family name. you need a common filter criteria. Filter by: Family Name. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. click Edit/New. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. and click Apply. Remember. And: Type Name. 31 Under Identity Data. Remember to click Apply. Next. you continue to create and define the filters. If you did not click Apply. verify that equals is selected. return. 37 On the Filters tab. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Click in the 2 . you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. Category: Ducts. Filter by: System Type. Filter by: Family Name. and enter Supply Air for system type name.Piping view to make it active. if differences exist in the selected elements. you can select it. create the following new filters according to the specifications. To filter multiple duct fitting types. verify that equals is selected. verify that equals is selected. Category: Duct Fittings. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. So.Round Connection. click in the Value column for Description. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. Category: Ducts. And: Type Name. Category: Ducts. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.Next. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. you will not see the Description type parameter. verify that equals is selected. then the type parameters will not display. and enter VG. Round Ducts. click the Filters tab. Filter by: Family Name. and select Air Terminal. you specify a family and a type name. you need to define the filter again. Category: Flex Ducts. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. Because you already entered the description. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. verify that equals is selected. you filter duct fittings by system type. ■ Flex Ducts . 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . So. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties.Duct Fittings. 33 Click OK twice. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. By selecting each air terminal type separately. This is because the selected supply. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. select M_600x600 . verify that equals is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. 39 Click OK. Next.Round. For Type. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Filter by: Family Name. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . 38 Using the methods that you just learned. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter.200 Neck. verify that equals is selected.

42 Under Visibility. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. Creating Piping Views | 131 . The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. You used this duct to create the duct riser. select all of the filters that you created. and click OK. 45 In the Project Browser. Next. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. This is because you have not added them. and click View Properties. 46 Enter 1 . Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. right-click 1 Mech. You now define the view properties. Next. do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. click Add. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Add Filters dialog.Piping for Name. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 47 Right-click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of 1 . Next. you activate the filters. under Graphics. and click OK.Mech. 43 Click OK. you add and activate the filters. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. A new view called Copy of 1 . Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. and click Rename.

verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. Next. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and to create the level 1 piping system. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 3D Mech. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. ducts. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 55 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 53 Click OK twice. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. clear Grids. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. Unlike the 2 . The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). you will be unable to view the duct riser. you change the view range. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. 52 In the View Range dialog. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. under Primary Range. and click OK.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline.Piping view displays the new view settings. scroll down to the Extents category. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. click the Annotation Categories tab. you will want to validate the geometry. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . under Graphics. such as halftone architecture. click the Filters tab. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. and click Rename. 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. and click View Properties. As you create the pipe runs.Piping view. The 1 . If you turn off ducts visibility. and under Visibility. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. and click Edit for View Range. Next. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry.

The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. you place the radiators and a boiler. 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. 65 Click OK. and double-click 2 . click Mechanical Equipment.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Save. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. 61 In the Add Filters dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. right-click the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. You also created filters to display certain system components. clear Section Box to turn it off. select all of the filters that you created. and click Piping. In this exercise. You used this duct to create the duct riser. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab.60 On the Filters tab. 67 In the Save As dialog. 62 Under Visibility. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name.Piping to make it the active view. 63 Click OK. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Add. under Extents. 66 If you want to save your work. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. except for the windows on the radius wall.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 8 Click to place the radiator. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view.

Next. Next. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. All level 2 radiators display in red. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. If the same type of component exists on another level. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. then these are different across the selected objects. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. double-click 1 . TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. you place the boiler. you modify the radiator flow rate. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. for Flow.25 for Flow. drag the section tail. and click Select All Instances. right-click a radiator. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. click .You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. If parameters are blank. If so.Piping to make this the active view.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. 14 Enter . Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. under Mechanical Loads. verify that 1. and you do not want to include it. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson.

and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector. verify that 14. watch the listening dimensions. Next. and click Element Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. under Type Parameters.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you verify the boiler flow rate. click Mechanical Equipment. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 20 In the drawing area. right-click the boiler. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.16 Enter ZR.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. you create the supply and return piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. As you assign radiators to systems. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. 24 In the Save As dialog. after you placed the radiators and boiler. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. then press F9. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and double-click 2 . you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. click in the drawing area to make it active. In this exercise. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. So. navigate to the folder of your choice. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. and click Save. If the System Browser does not respond. and then create the logical connection between these system components.22 Click OK. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. click File menu ➤ Save. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Thus. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. During this exercise. analyses cannot be performed. if all system components are assigned. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name.Piping to make it the active view. click System Browser. click the Training Files icon. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. 23 If you want to save your work. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. all other components are unavailable. 6 On the Options Bar. All level 2 radiators display in red. click supply system. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. and click Select All Instances. Notice that after you click . click (Create Hydronic Supply System). 7 On the Options Bar. right-click. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. (Select Equipment for System). 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. The organization is from upstream. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . 9 On the Options Bar. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. press Tab. Next. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. So. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. Thus. This display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. and select the system. you create the return piping system. click . 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that is does not display. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. and click Select to select the system. right-click.

and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. or even without pipe being drawn. navigate to the folder of your choice. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. expand Piping. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. and click Select. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. click File menu ➤ Save. in the next exercise. 13 Right-click each category. 18 In the Save As dialog. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. and cleared from the Options Bar. 17 If you want to save your work.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. These listings represent the systems that you just created. In this exercise. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. and click Save.

and then select Mechanical Equipment. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 2 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click OK. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 .Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Filter box.Piping view range highlight. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs.Piping to make it the active view.

The system displays in red. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . then the Select a System dialog will open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). 7 Click OK. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. click Layout Path. you can place the cursor over a radiator. 5 On the Options Bar. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. the boiler. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. select Hydronic Supply 1. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. Notice that the radiators. 6 In the Select a System dialog. You will need to select a system to create the layout. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Then.

verify that Main is selected. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. Enter -375mm for Offset. It does not reference the architecture. click Settings. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 .The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. 10 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. Later in this exercise. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). verify that Solutions is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. ■ Click (Next Solution). NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. Using this inset. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.00° is specified for Slope. Next. ■ Verify that 0.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . For more information. structural beams. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. zoom the view. click Modify. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. duct. 15 Click OK. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 17 In the drawing area. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you now modify the layout path. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. Enter -375 for Offset. The layout path is located under the radiators.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. or architecture. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). and other obstacles. refer to Help. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Branch.

drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 . 18 Using the drag control.A drag control displays.

or manually modify the pipe. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select a different layout solution. and is not part of the system. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

In the Mechanical Settings dialog. To turn off hidden lines. Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . This is caused by the hidden line setting. Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. If a pipe is hidden by an object.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). select Fine for Detail Level. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry.

25 Place the cursor over the pipe. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. Medium for 2-line duct display. Next. On the View Control Bar. select Coarse for single line display. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. and click to select them. Instead of moving the pipe. Additionally. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red.23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. So. The design requires 2 zones.

and click Modify on the Design Bar. 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select 25mm for D: (diameter). the logical connection (or system) is still intact. Next. Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted.26 Press Delete to delete the selection. and click to select it. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). 29 On the Options Bar. you modify the supply pipe run diameter. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 .

Next. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. and equipment. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. the diameter would not display. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. The first time you press Tab. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. press Tab 3 times. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. If the entire network does not highlight. then you know that a disconnect exists. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. fittings. If the pipes had different diameters. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run.

34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. You need to correct the disconnect. you can click to select them. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected. This allows you to better see disconnects.

37 Click the plus sign located to the left. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. 36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow. You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. and select it.

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . and click the right plus sign. A minus sign displays. 38 Click the tee fitting. 40 Click the elbow fitting. TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control.

and after the fitting end point snap displays. The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. 43 In the Type Selector. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. select Pipe Types : Standard. click Pipe. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. click to specify the pipe segment start point.

and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector. click to specify the segment end point. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short.TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. a connection may not occur. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. If drawing contiguous segments. and then specify an end point. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. If you do not use the connector snap. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. use the connector snap. If you pause briefly. TIP When drawing pipe. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. NOTE When drawing pipe. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. to locate a connector and create the connection. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically. and after the connector snap displays. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. . Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment.

50 On the View Options Bar.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run. Scroll. click (Dynamically Modify View). specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. you validate the pipe geometry. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. 51 On the View toolbar. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. use the Zoom. and press TAB twice to check connectivity. and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. Next. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. Verify that 0. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 .00° is specified for Slope. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. Use the same method to correct any disconnects.Next. ■ In the Layout Path tool. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs.Piping view. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. Enter 600 for Inset. Remember. you create the return pipe run. Select Perimeter solution 3. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. For pipe conversion settings.

you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. and click Save. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. 54 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. converted fittings. In this exercise. In the next exercise. You checked connectivity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. navigate to the folder of your choice. 55 In the Save As dialog. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. corrected disconnects. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save.

and the second click specifies the section tail.Piping to make it the active view.1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the section head. click Zoom in Region. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). Adding a section view is a 2-click process. and click to specify the section head location. click Section. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. and double-click 2 . and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. After you add the section. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view.

160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail.

click Modify. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click Properties. 8 In the Project Browser. The section relocates under Piping. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . right-click Section 4. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The section head and tail display. and click OK. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. select Piping for Sub Discipline. 11 On the View Control Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 7 On the Design Bar. select Fine for Detail Level. under Graphics.

mechanical equipment placement. and other aspects of your systems design. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. Next.Piping to make it the active view. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. and after the connectors display. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 .The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. place the cursor over the top connector.

The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays. release the mouse button to reconnect it. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting.

always connect to pipe segments. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. you split the supply pipe segment. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. 19 Zoom out. click (Split). and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. fittings. and select the return pipe segment again. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting.NOTE When modifying pipe. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. Next. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. 21 On the Edit toolbar. If you split the pipe. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap.

25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. move the cursor down. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. 24 With the Split tool open. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and draw the pipe around the stairs. and press Delete to delete it. Next. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. Zoom out the view. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. you convert a tee fitting.

verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 32 Zoom out the view. Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left. and after the end point connector snap displays. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. and move the cursor to the left. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. 30 In the Type Selector. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation.

especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. click to specify the segment end point.34 Draw the pipe down. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. and after the connector snap displays. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. NOTE When drawing pipe.

The return pipe run is connected as shown. This activates the Draw tool. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. 38 Right-click the lower connector.

the pipe diameter. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . 43 On the Edit toolbar. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. click to specify the move start point. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays. First. Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment. IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. specify the move destination or end point. or width and height. However. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. Second.39 In the Type Selector. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. This needs to be corrected. click (Move).

45 Move the cursor up. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. and after the listening dimensions appear. The interference has been resolved. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Next. enter100. Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). and press ENTER to specify the move end point.

click (Split). Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. watch the listening dimensions. and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. select Fine for Detail Level. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. Otherwise. 49 Press ESC. and double-click the section head to open the section view. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. 57 Using the methods that you learned. 54 On the Edit toolbar. you may get a false positive result. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs.The section displays in red. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference.Piping to make it the active view. 50 On the View Control Bar. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . Although this section was used for air systems.

Remember to watch for connector snaps. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 58 Again. using the methods that you learned.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Draw. In the next exercise. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 1 In the Project Browser. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Connecting the Boiler | 173 . and offset are automatically specified. Using Create Similar. 61 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Then. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. Remember that after you create pipe. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. diameter (or width and height). the pipe type is also matched. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. you used the Split. click the Training Files icon. Open the m Connecting Boiler. In this exercise. the start point. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Using these 2 methods.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. and click Save. (2) Connect to a snap. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. 60 If you want to save your work. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. preferably a connector snap. navigate to the folder of your choice. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector.

You will design in the 2 . 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs.Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views. and double-click 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. the active view is the only open window. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. the active view is tiled to the left. 3 In the Project Browser.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session.

This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1. click Pipe.8 Zoom in on the boiler. 13 On the Options Bar.8mm. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 10 In the Type Selector. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. Enter -1500 for Offset. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. and after the connector snap displays. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. watch the listening dimensions. 14 Move the cursor to the left. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.

16 On the Options Bar. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). after listening dimensions display. zoom the view and try again.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. In a later exercise. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment.) to separate snap increments. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. click to specify the pipe segment end point. and click to specify the end point. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. 3275mm from level 1. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. enter -375 for Offset. TIP When drawing pipe.

and after the connector snap displays. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.The boiler supply connector pipe is created. release the mouse button to connect to it. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. Connecting the Boiler | 177 . 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe.

The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.

click the tee to display the connectors. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. 27 In the 3D Piping view.Piping view to make it active. right-click the right connector. 28 Click in the 2 . 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.Next. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. 29 Zoom in on the tee. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 24 With the windows tiled. Connecting the Boiler | 179 . and click it.

draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. Verify that Angle is cleared. and the start point is automatically specified. 30 In the Type Selector. connect the right supply pipe run. and after listening dimensions display.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. enter -375 for Offset. In a later exercise. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. 35 With the Draw tool activated. 32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. 34 On the Options Bar. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. click to specify the end point. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. 33 Draw the pipe up. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. enter 900 and press Enter. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. 31 On the Options Bar.

Connecting the Boiler | 181 . 39 Validate the pipe geometry.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 38 Check connectivity.

This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. and that Auto Connect is selected. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. 43 On the Options Bar.Piping the active view. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. and right-click the return connector. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. 41 Select the boiler. 42 In the Type Selector. 45 On the Options Bar. and the 2 . and enter 150 and press Enter. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. enter -525 for Offset. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run.Next. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and click to specify the end point. zoom in on the boiler. Next. 44 Move the cursor up. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

47 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. If Auto Connect is not selected. 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. an automatic connection is made. click to specify the end point. verify that Auto Connect is selected. you draw the return pipe to the left.Next. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. the connection is not made. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. Make certain that the 2 . As you draw. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane.

and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 53 Again. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. click to specify the end point. 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment. You see it clearly in the 3D view. and right-click the top connector. and click Draw Pipe. 51 Select the return pipe segment. clear Auto Connect. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. 52 On the Options Bar.

To turn off hidden lines. If the pipe segment or run is closed. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. On an open pipe segment or run. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. press it once to stop drawing the current object. press ESC to deactivate the tool. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. Next. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). Connecting the Boiler | 185 . select Hidden Line. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. TIP When drawing pipe. 56 Draw the pipe to the left. click the specify the end point. 55 Select the return pipe segment. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. In the floor plan view. If a pipe is hidden by an object. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0.Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool.

and after the connector snap displays. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. click to connect to the left return pipe run. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 59 Zoom in on the boiler. 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned.

and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. right-click the right connector. click to specify the end point. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run.61 Select the tee fitting. and click to specify the end point. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . and click Draw Pipe. 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe.64 Using the method that you learned. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

68 Using the section view creation method that you learned. draw a section view. Next. and adjust the view as shown. Connecting the Boiler | 189 .67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler.

and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view. under Graphics. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 70 In the Project Browser. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. click Fine for Detail Level. select Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click OK. 73 On the View Control Bar. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 71 Right-click in the drawing area. click View Properties.

Next. select the reference point where you want to align. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. First.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. 76 With the 2 . Connecting the Boiler | 191 . 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. click to specify the alignment reference point. and then you select the point to align.Piping view. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. 77 On the Tools toolbar. and after highlights. click (Align). If the Tools toolbar is not available. in the 2 .

192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click to specify the point to align.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe.

81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. 80 Using the alignment method you just learned.The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 . Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.The aligned return pipes are as shown. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

Piping to make it the active view. and after it highlights. and double-click 2 . you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. and click to select them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. you size the supply and return piping runs. click File menu ➤ Save. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . 1 In the Project Browser. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. click the Training Files icon. Finally. In the next exercise.Friction & Velocity. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. and click Save. 85 In the Save As dialog. 84 If you want to save your work. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Pipe Sizing .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior.

Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. select a different layout solution. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and enter 2. and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. click Sizing.00 Pa/m. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Friction. or manually modify the pipe.5 m/s for Velocity. The sized pipe runs are sized. ■ Click OK. Select And. and enter 250. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In this exercise. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 8 If you want to save your work. 9 In the Save As dialog. enter Pipe Sizing . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.Friction & Velocity Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Save. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 .Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. TIP When tiling 2 views. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser.Piping view. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. the active view is the only open window. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. the active view is tiled to the left. Note that if this option is unavailable. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. click the Training Files icon. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Project Browser. You place the pumps in the 2 . Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping to make it the active view. and double-click 2 .

8 Watch the listening dimensions. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. click to place the circulator pump. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . 12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.7 On the Edit toolbar. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. 13 In the Type Selector. click (Split). The selected pipe segment displays in red. and after the centerline snap displays. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. click Mechanical Equipment. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment.

drag the pump away from the pipe. and then move it over the pipe opening. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point. 200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 16 Press ESC twice. and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. 17 In the 3D Piping view.TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. under Constraints. and after the connector snap displays. click the pipe segment. If the pump remains selected. Next. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. click the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset.Piping view.Actually. or press ESC. you connect the pump. The selected pump displays in red. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. enter -1500 for Offset. 18 In the 2 . and select Element Properties. You can also right-click the pump. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. 19 On the Options Bar. Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. 22 In the 2 . 21 Click OK.Piping view. click Modify on the Design Bar. To clear the selection. click . This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. you can click in the drawing area.

and press TAB. 26 Place the cursor over the pump.Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. After connecting the pump. 25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. you need to check connectivity.

Next. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. 28 With the 2 . you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top. 27 Using the methods that you just learned. and check connectivity. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 .

31 Click the rotation control on the right. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. 32 Using the method that you just learned.

Expand the Piping folder. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. You can also press F9. and so on) that you placed to a system. As you learned in previous exercises.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. System tools display on the Options Bar. select the left supply pipe riser. After you assign the components to a system. click System Browser. Immediately after placement. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. they move to their respective system folder. 35 In the 3D Piping view. 34 In the System Browser. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

In the next exercise. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and click Save. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. Finally. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. and by clicking the rotation controls. boilers and AC units. 40 If you want to save your work. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. Using the System Inspector. If you use this tool. NOTE Do not click .TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. pressure. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. In this exercise. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. click File menu ➤ Save. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. 36 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Add To System. click (Edit System). click Finish System. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 41 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. such as VAV boxes. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A tooltip also displays this system information. mechanical equipment. select any pipe segment. and click OK. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. System tools display on the Options Bar. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. and pressure information including pressure loss. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. 5 On the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. System tools appear on the Options Bar.Piping to make it the active view. After the System Inspector activates. select Hydronic Supply 1. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. flow. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 6 In the Select a System dialog. Right-click a system from the System Browser. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. NOTE To select a system. click the Training Files icon. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and so on that you have assigned to a system. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. and click Inspect from the context menu. fitting. click Inspect. click (Inspect). and double-click 2 .

Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. As you inspect. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . also known as the critical path.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Next. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system.

and quickly target those systems that need attention. You also compared system information across a system.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. and click Save. use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. and for pipe sizing. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. In this exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. 17 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. navigate to the folder of your choice. double-click the 3D Piping view. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). click File menu ➤ Save. flow. 18 In the Save As dialog. 16 Using the methods that you learned. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. In this exercise. you need to validate them. you check the piping systems.

the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. the pipe is now associated with that system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. The piping system is logically and physically valid. click Check Pipe Systems. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. After you assign the system components to a system. thus assigning the components to a system. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. If the System Browser does not respond. check system warnings may occur. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Then. Next. click the Training Files icon. Next. However. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. double-click the 2 . For example. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. then press F9. click in the drawing area to make it active. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser.Piping to make it the active view. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Warnings display.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. right-click the Design Bar. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. In the System Browser. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. and for pipe sizing. you confirm the system component assignments. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and click Piping. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As a tutorial exercise. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. click Check Duct Systems. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar.

6 In the Project Browser. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. The supply system that you created. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . Checking Piping Systems | 211 . 12 In the System Browser. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. The red lines represent the default logical connection. 10 Using the same methods. TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Expand All. you confirm the piping system assignments. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. click Close. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. otherwise. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.Piping to make it the active view.Because you assigned all piping components.

parametrically modify those designs. a boiler. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. 17 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . navigate to the folder of your choice.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. it is a valid system without problems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. and section views. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. In the lesson. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. For pipe offset. 3D. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. and fin-tube radiators. the creation and modification methods remained the same. Explore different system designs.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. Design the system in the 1 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. Depending on your air systems design. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. circulator pumps. In this exercise. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. and click Save. Finally. In this tutorial. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. 16 If you want to save your work. For additional practice.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. 15 Using the methods that you learned.

autodesk. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. After finishing each exercise. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. If the tutorial datasets are not present. 213 . you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial.

expand Wiring. wiring. in the left pane. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. then applying the appropriate template to each plan. distribution systems. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. Later. power distribution systems. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. For example. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. analyze. 3 Click Wiring Types. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. and demand factors that you will use in your project. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. and demand factors that are applied in the design. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. click the Training Files icon. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. the Limit Offset. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building.rvt. apply templates to your views. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. wiring. The electrical settings determine the voltages. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. For this reason. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. and click Add. and in the right pane. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels.

00 V 490. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. By specifying a range.00 V 480.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 260.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 .00 V 220.00 V 208.00 V 460.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V 277. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. click Voltage Definitions. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120.00 V 200.00 V 280. For example.00 V Minimum 110.

or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 8 In the right pane. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Distribution Systems. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. For example. this type of system (High. 9 Click Demand Factors. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. Red. NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. even though this is physically impossible.

right-click Level 1. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser. enter 1-Power.000VA 3.000VA 10. For this exercise.000VA. For example. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. at any given time. leave the default settings as shown here. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. 13 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. 14 Using the same method. Power. and click OK.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. create another copy of level 1. for Name. and rename it 1-Lighting.000VA 10. HVAC. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10.000VA. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. or Other systems in your project based on their load. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. 10 Click OK. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load.

rfa M_Receptacle. expand Ceiling Plans. which further defines their position in the project browser. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. and the view range. right-click 1-Power. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click OK. you need to apply settings. right-click Level 1. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. right-click 1-Lighting. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. 15 In the Project Browser. apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. and click Apply View Template. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline. 17 In the Rename View dialog. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. expand Families. click Lighting Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. View templates let you easily control view properties. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. the view discipline. select Power Plan from the list of templates. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. and click Apply View Template. 28 While pressing Ctrl. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. Lighting Plan. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. and click OK. The Power Plan. and click Rename. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. 30 In the Project Browser. which are available from view templates. and click OK. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. 20 In the Select View Template dialog.rfa 29 Click Open. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. 25 Using the same method. and click Apply View Template. 27 In the Open dialog.

31 Using the same method. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. as described below. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219. click the Training Files icon. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement.Surface. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. In this exercise. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. conference rooms. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. 33 You can save the open file if you wish.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert. Later. restrooms.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder.rvt. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this case the key style is the type of room and. and so on). and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers. and established the parameters for your wiring. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. Open the provided dataset. As you loaded each of the component families. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Under Parameter Data. click Add. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. has also been added under Lighting Device. reopen the Electrical folder. and demand factors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. selected components for your electrical systems.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . containing several switch types. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project.Surface. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. voltages. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. distribution systems.

select Electrical. However. For Name. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. click to select the room. enter Room Lighting Requirements. select Illuminance. For Group. Select Instance. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. In the Element Properties dialog. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 4 Click OK twice. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. ■ Click Schedule keys. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. For Type. double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Lighting category. select Electrical-Lighting. 7 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. click (Properties). and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. To verify this. Under Categories. 8 Click Cancel. and when the cross-hairs display. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner.

Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. 12 Click OK. click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 . one for each type of room in the building. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. ■ Click OK. enter Lighting Levels. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list.■ For Key Name. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar.

click . 21 Using the same method. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. 20 Click OK.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. In a worksharing environment. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. For tutorial purposes. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. assume you would have full access to this view. then right-click. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. and for Lighting Level parameter. scroll down to the Identity Data category. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. and select Open Office. then right-click one of the selections. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. In the Project Browser. While pressing Ctrl. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. NOTE Generally. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting category. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. Office). under Instance Parameters. and click Element Properties. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Properties and. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. in the Element Properties dialog. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule.

Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. as described below. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. For example. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. if required. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Consequently.

and click OK. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. select Underline. 14 Click OK twice. select Required Lighting . 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select Required Lighting Level. click Color Scheme Legend. click the Training Files icon. select Required Lighting Level. 6 For Color. and place it in the drawing. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. Under Title Text. for the Color. click Edit/New. select Show Title. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and click (Duplicate). enter Required Lighting. and click Element Properties. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. for Name. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.rvt. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click OK. select Rooms for Category.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Title. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

and work toward the higher voltage. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.7 You can save the open file if you wish. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Open the provided dataset. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. as described below. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

and for Panel Name. under Instance Parameters. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. select Electrical Equipment. and click to place the panel as shown. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 9 Click OK. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. select 480/277 Wye. click the Training Files icon. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Modify and select the panel you just placed. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. click Electrical Equipment. 4 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment. under Electrical . select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. click . for Distribution Sys. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1-Power. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. Right-click the panel.Loads.Surface : M_250A. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. 6 On the Options Bar.Loads category. click Element Properties. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown.rvt.

Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . select Electrical Equipment. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. under Instance Parameters. enter L-1. enter T1. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click . under Instance Parameters.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. 14 On the Options Bar. Since this is a transformer. and for Panel Name. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click Modify. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 16 Click OK.Loads category.Loads category. scroll down to the Electrical . for Distribution Sys. 20 Select the panel you just placed. select 120/208 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. For Panel Name. and on the Options Bar. for Distribution Sys. select 480/277 Wye. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. click . 23 Click OK. scroll down to the Electrical .Surface : M_100A.

A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. and click 30 On the Options Bar. select panel L-2. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and select panel H-2 for Panel. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel. 29 Select the transformer T2. The temporary circuit displays as shown. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click .Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. 26 On the Options Bar. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. click (Create Power Circuit). 28 On the Options Bar. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 27 Click (Select Panel). .

A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. . 37 Close the 2-Power view. 38 On the Options Bar. 34 In the 2-Power view. click .31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. and on the Options Bar. select the L-1 panel. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. select the H-2 panel. and click 39 Click . Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. click 35 On the Option Bar. and select the MDP panel. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. . and select the T1 transformer as the panel.

. click the Training Files icon. Circuits are used for power. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. and data systems. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. and select the MDP panel. lighting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. click . “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250.rvt. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click 41 On the Options Bar. 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .40 Select the T1 transformer. Open the provided dataset. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. as described below.

leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . click . The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. For now. 4 On the Options Bar. and voltage (120 V). select all the receptacles in the corner room. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). load (180 VA). The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. 3 While pressing Ctrl. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room.

You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click circuit. and click to select the circuit again. press Tab. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. 6 Click Modify. and press Tab. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. 8 On the Options Bar.

You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. respectively for this circuit. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. change the value from 20A to 50A. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . select Circuit Properties. under Instance Parameters. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. The currently specified values are 1-#12. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. click . The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. 1-#12. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 16 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. . 1-#10. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. scroll down to the Electrical . creating power circuits. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 1-#6. click Cancel Circuit. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit.11 On the Options Bar. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. 1-#12. and ground wiring. and select panel L-1. When editing a circuit. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. which are the wire sizes for the load. click The circuit is created. and click Element Properties. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building.Loads category. If you select L-1 in the drawing. and select panel L-1. click . 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. 19 Close the warning message. 22 Click OK. neutral. and add it to panel L-1. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. click (Edit Circuit). 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again.

and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as previously described. These will be connected in a later exercise. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. click . 27 Using the same procedures. 29 Select the L-1 panel. click . 25 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). These will be connected in a later exercise.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. and then select panel L-1. 26 Continue creating circuits. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2.

you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. you have assigned only 17. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. 1 In the Project Browser. Finally. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. As you saw in the previous exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. as described below. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. In the left pane of the Open dialog.In the Edit Circuits dialog.

This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 6 On the Options Bar.4 On the Options Bar. 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click (Filter). 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click . Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. 5 In the Filter dialog. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. 7 Close the message window and. as shown. and click OK.

click . as in this step. When creating wires. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 .9 On the Options Bar. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. click . or floors. 10 On the Options Bar. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. ceilings. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. click .

Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. click . lighting fixtures. Later. one neutral conductor. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. click . press Tab. for Hot Conductors. ground) in the wire run. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Check None. you can specify splined wiring. In the next steps.In this step. enter 2. select Wires. and click OK. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. 16 Using the same method. and click OK. 13 In the Filter dialog. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. When this occurs. Splined wiring is similar to arc. but with an additional vertex. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. 12 On the Options Bar. enter 2 as the value. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. you created arc type wiring. and one ground conductor). 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. neutral. when you create wiring manually. and click the switch to select the switches. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. under Instance Parameters. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors.

continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. and assign the circuits to panel H-2.18 For more practice. lounge. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . These will be connected in a later exercise. assign the circuit to panel H-2. and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. conference room. Otherwise. 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2.

2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. assign lighting fixtures to switches.21 You can save the open file if you wish. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. click (Create Switch System). but does not prevent you from doing so. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. fixtures.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. and panel information. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. and specify switch IDs for switches. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.

After creating the switch system. Creating Switch Systems | 261 . click Finish to confirm your selections. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. 5 On the Options Bar. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. click (Edit Switch System). click Remove From System.4 Click (Select Switch for System). and on the Options Bar. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). select Multiple.

click 14 Click . click . enter Main Entrance .West. under Instance Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.1st Floor. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. and click OK. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system. 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. click Finish. enter North Stairwell . for Switch ID. 9 Click Switch Properties. 13 On the Options Bar. for Switch ID. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. click Finish System. 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Select Switch. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. and click OK. . 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. click Finish System. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. 16 Click Switch Properties.8 On the Options Bar. 20 Click . under Instance Properties. and on the Options Bar.

and for Heading. stairwell. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.21 Using the same method. Verify that Ascending is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. scroll down the Available fields list. enter Room Number. select Number from the Fields list. Click OK. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. select Number. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Creating Switch Systems | 263 . 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. enter Switch Systems. For Name. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. scroll down the Available fields list. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Rooms.

Create separate systems for the lounge. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. conference room. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. restrooms. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. click the Training Files icon. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.2nd Floor for the switch ID. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. and private offices.The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. Specify Open Area . Otherwise. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. as described below. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 31 You can save the open file if you wish. 30 For more practice. Open the provided dataset.

9 On the Options Bar. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. and delete both home runs. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. click Wire.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.rvt. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 5 Using the same method. 3 In the corner room. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it.

12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire. as shown. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire.10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. 266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

if necessary. when the wiring is completed. and using the same method. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible. When completed.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. The direction will be corrected.

14 Click Modify. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room. select Insert Vertex. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and a shared safety ground). Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. as each room was added to the wiring run. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. and click. a shared neutral. 17 Right click the wire run. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. In the previous steps. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector.Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel.

or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . The wire behaves like a spline. 19 For additional practice. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views.

as described below. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. In this exercise. Open the provided dataset. click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans.

There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 7 In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). each with a load of 180VA. 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. and click Select. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. collapse Power. Checking Your Design | 271 . drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. release the mouse button. and expand Unassigned. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. 8 In the System Browser.

272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. and on the Options Bar. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. click to select the circuit. click to create permanent wiring. press Tab. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. click . 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. click Add to Circuit. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 16 Click Finish Circuit. In the System Browser.

enter 2. 25 On the Options Bar. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 19 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 273 . 18 In the 1-Lighting view. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. 24 In the drawing area. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. In the System Browser. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click . and click OK. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. select Wires. 21 Click . click Check None. under Instance Parameters. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Filter dialog. press Tab. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. for Hot Conductors.

select panel L-1. to create permanent wiring. click Check Circuits. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. and in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.26 On the Options Bar. create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. click 27 Click . 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 28 Using the same method.

33 Close the Warning dialog. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. Finally.rvt. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel.31 Click to view details of the warning. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In this exercise. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below.

select panel L-2. and double-click 2-Power. Examination of the loads on Phase A. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. B. and Phase C provides 4140 VA. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. click . while Phase A provides 4500 VA. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. In the Project Browser. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). click Rebalance Loads.

for panel H-2. 13 In the Type Selector. 5 Select panel H-2. and the T1 transformer. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. and 11 feed panel H-2. a load of 18844 VA. 4. and 6 feed transformer T1. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. and circuits 7. and on the Options Bar. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. click . click . Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. enter 100A for the Trip value. 9. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). the distribution is shifted.After re-balancing loads. L-1 and MDP. and on the Options Bar. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. select the T1 transformer. and for T1. 7 In the Project Browser. enter 40A for the Trip value. 12 In 1-Power view. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. Circuits 2. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. a load of 12780 VA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. double-click 1-Power. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. H-2 is a 100A panel. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. After the loads are balanced. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . so no further changes are required. Therefore. the H-2 panel. 11 Click OK. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. Therefore. you can use a 30kVA transformer. Had there been a greater imbalance. you may see different values for the loads. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog.

00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. . The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. click . 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1.00A. 24 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 19 With panel L-1 selected. 1-#12. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . select panel L-1. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 1-#3.14 In the Error dialog. select panel H-2. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 23 Click OK. enter 40A for the Trip value. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 1-#12. 100. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 1-#8. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. enter 100A for Rating. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. under Instance Parameters. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. click Disconnect. on the Options Bar. for transformer T2. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that it changes to 3-#3. 22 Scroll down. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. click (Circuit Properties). and click Element Properties. 18 Click OK.

select T2. 38 On the Options Bar. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 34 Click OK. select the T2 transformer. 29 In the Type Selector. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. click . you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . 37 Close the Warning. and on the Options Bar. 36 With the MDP panel selected. 30 In the Error dialog. under Electrical Loads. under Instance Parameters. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit.27 Click OK. 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 28 In the 2-Power view. select panel L-2. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.00A. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. click Disconnect. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. . 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. hot and cold water piping. you will understand the process. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. However. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. methodology. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. At the end of this tutorial. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. and sanitary piping. including plumbing fixtures. go to http://www. If the tutorial datasets are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. 281 . You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. As you create the plumbing system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. By following this workflow. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008.

10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The selected component families are loaded into the project. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. are added under Families in the Project Browser. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. All of the loaded families.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.rfa 5 Click Open. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures.rfa 11 Click Open.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this lesson. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP.

select Tee For Tee. and click Properties. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click the Training Files icon. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. under Mechanical. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. select None For Cross. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Duplicate.rvt. under Mechanical. 1 In the Project Browser. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. and press Enter. and click Duplicate. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems. select Tee For Tee. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. and click Properties. 2 Right-click PVC. click Rename. 7 Rename the new pipe type. 3 Right-click PVC 2. select None For Cross. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. right-click PVC Sanitary. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. PVC Sanitary Vent.

you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . you add 2 toilets. click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. Finally. You then modify the piping. 3 sinks. ZR (Zoom Region). and 3 sinks. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing to make it the active view. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. click Plumbing Fixture. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. 3 urinals. and double-click 2 . 3 wall-mounted urinals. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

verify that Vertical Face) is selected. click to place the toilet. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left.6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. click to place the toilet. click to place the toilet. click Plumbing Fixture. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 .

move the cursor up. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall.) 12 Click Modify. 16 Move the cursor down. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . verify that References is selected for Pick. 17 Using the same method. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. click Dimension. 18 Working from left to right. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. (The placement is not critical. and click to place the dimension annotation. (Aligned) is selected. and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall. and click to place the dimension annotation. click the centerline of each urinal. and click.

and press Delete. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. 25 In the drawing area. and in the Type Selector. select Sink Single Island : Public. select Pick.19 Select the rightmost urinal. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). select the counter top. click Plumbing Fixture. and enter 500. and click OK. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. 21 While pressing Ctrl. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . under Specify a new Work Plane. and for Plane. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. click the value for the blue dimension. select Pick a plane. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall.

28 Place a second sink near the right wall. and then delete the dimension annotations. equalize the space between sinks. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. (The placement is not critical. 30 On the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. 29 Click Modify. and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. click Dimension.

click Plumbing Fixture. In this exercise. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click Edit. and double-click 2 . You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. 36 You can save the open file if you wish. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. urinals. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. 35 Click Modify.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). and click to place the floor drain. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. as shown.rvt. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. select Level : Level 2. and for Plane. and floor drain. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. scroll down to View Range. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. and click View Properties.Plumbing to make it the active view. under Extents. and in the Type selector. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Main. 21 Click Modify. specify -300 13 Click OK. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. specify -300 11 In the left panel. 6 On the View Control Bar. click View ➤ Piping. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. and in the Type Selector. specify -1500 for Level Offset. 5 Click OK twice. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. click Mechanical Settings. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Branch. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.4 In the View Range dialog. 9 In the right panel. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. and under View Depth. specify Fine for Detail Level. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Primary Range. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. Click Window ➤ System Browser. click Mechanical Equipment. select Sanitary from the System Type list. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.

as shown. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. enter -1200 for Offset. low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. and click Element Properties. The elevation will be specified as -1200. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The urinals. and floor drain. click (Create Sanitary System). and click OK. 26 On the Options bar. under Constraints. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. toilets.The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. click area. (Select Equipment for System). and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 . and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser.

The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. For more information on Layout Path solutions. enter 1. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. 28 Click Solutions. click Layout Path. as shown. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals. as needed. click Modify. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . see Layout Paths. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). and on the Design Bar. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.00 for Slope. to view them. and on the Options Bar.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . 33 Click Finish Solution. and drag it into the chase.32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. in line with the branch segment.

and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When fittings are reversed. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Select each pipe segment in the system. and check the slope control. checking for the proper connectivity. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. The third tab should highlight the entire system. as shown. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools. slope. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. The second tab highlights the fixture.

39 On the View Control Bar. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . Enter the keyboard shortcut. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. VG (Visibility/Graphics). and double-click 3D Plumbing. 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. specify Fine for Detail Level.35 In the Project Browser. click Show categories from all disciplines.

click the Training Files icon. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.40 You can save the open file if you wish. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and double-click 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system.

and when the extension snap displays. enter 3950. enter 1. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning.00 for Slope Angle. right-click the connector on the open leg. and press Enter. When you press the space bar. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. click Options. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. click to place the fitting. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. press the Space Bar once. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. If you select the pipe. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall.4 Select the tee. 8 Click Modify. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. enter 1000 for Slope Run. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. click Pipe Fitting.

click Options. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and click Draw Pipe. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click the size for the wye leg. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click to place the fitting. and when the wall centerline snap displays. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. highlight the wye. click Pipe Fitting. and on the Options Bar.11 Select the fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 17 In the Layout Options dialog. enter 50. and when the extension snap displays.00 for Slope Angle. click to specify the end of the pipe. and press Enter. right click the connector on the open leg. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click OK. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. 14 Using the method learned earlier. 15 Select the wye fitting.

In this case. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 20 On the Options Bar. click Apply. click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 150 for Offset. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . and click Modify.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor.

click Pipe. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. press Space. click Options. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg.If necessary. 22 In the 3D view. enter 45. specify 200 for Offset.00 for Slope Angle. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. This is best done by carefully following these steps. 32 Click Modify. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 24 On the Plumbing tab. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. click Pipe Fitting. and on the Options Bar. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. and click OK. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and click to place the fitting. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. and on the Options Bar. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 26 Select the double wye fitting. click to specify the end of the pipe.

and when Horizontal and Extension displays. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. click Pipe again. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 42 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. and on the Options Bar. click Options. 43 Click Modify. click Pipe again. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. and press Delete. specify 400 for Offset. click to specify the end of the pipe. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. click the connector snap. and double-click 2 . 36 In the Layout Options dialog. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and press Delete. verify that 45. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. an elbow. and click OK. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. and select the leftmost sink. and click Apply. and another segment of pipe. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting. 38 Click Modify.Plumbing.00 for Slope Angle is specified. 44 In the Project Browser. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye.

49 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Options. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. 48 In the Layout Options dialog. select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 52 In the Project Browser. 54 While pressing Ctrl. specify 450 for Offset. 50 Click Modify. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. specify 0. and click to specify the end of the pipe. 51 Select Pipe again. and click OK. double-click 3D Plumbing. and on the Options Bar. specify 40 mm for Size. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall.

and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 58 While pressing Ctrl. 60 Using the same method. 56 On the Options Bar. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . and click Finish to create piping for that solution. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. and on the Options Bar. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. 57 Select solution 3 of 3.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. 63 On the Options Bar. click Routing Solutions. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. and select a proposed solution. click Routing Solutions. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections.

The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. right-click Sanitary 1. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. you can make minor adjustments to the system. and in the Type Selector. click Add to System. 65 Using the same method. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. and click Select. click (Edit System). When the piping was created for the sink drains. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. 67 On the Options Bar. 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. and click Finish System. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope.64 Enter 1. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. 72 While pressing Ctrl. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. select all 3 sinks.00 for Slope. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. 69 One at a time. You can move fixtures by dragging. When zoomed in close. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. and click Finish. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. 66 In the System Browser. 68 On the Design Bar. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope. there is a smaller movement. Now that the routing is completed. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. modifying offset values. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . the entire system should be highlighted. click File menu ➤ Save As. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. (After the third tab.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. 77 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 74 Using the method learned earlier. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. highlight the leftmost sink. otherwise.) 75 If you want to save your work. skip the next 2 steps.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.78 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. 4 Select the upper elbow. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. select it and on the toolbar. click the Training Files icon. click (Move). “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. adjusting the sanitary stack.rvt. while maintaining the same angle. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Delete. and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. and select the horizontal pipe. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown. 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow.

10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and on the Options Bar. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 . and when the Extension snap displays. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard.8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. specify 150 for D (diameter). and click to place the fitting.

and click Modify. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The wye is added to the vertical segment. click Section. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. and click piping. select the wye. double-click 2 . If necessary. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing. 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar. enter 100 to change its size. click the value for the 45 degree leg.11 Click Modify. and press Enter. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye.

18 On the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle. 17 Zoom in. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and select the reducing wye fitting.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view.Plumbing. for Detail Level. specify Fine. click Pipe. click Options. and when Vertical and Extension displays. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg. 19 In the Project Browser. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click OK. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . double-click 3D . and on the Options Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. enter 45. and press Enter. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. enter -750 for Offset. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

27 Select solution 2 of 2. 26 While pressing Ctrl. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. an elbow. and on the Options Bar. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). select the short pipe segment and the main pipe.24 Click Modify. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. click Routing Solutions. and another segment of pipe. and press Delete.

and click the connector snap. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . 29 On the Plumbing tab. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click Apply. 31 On the Options Bar. specify 1200 for Offset. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. click Pipe. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. 32 Click Modify. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping.36 Proceed to the next exercise.Plumbing to make it the active view.) 3 Press Delete. 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. running it inside the wall.rvt. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 . Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. click the connector snap. click the Training Files icon. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. use the Filter tool to select only piping. (If necessary. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .

press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. 8 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain. double-click 3D. and click Options. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter). specify 1. enter 300 for Offset.Plumbing to make it the active view. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.00 for Slope Angle. starting at the level of the original pipe. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 .The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. 11 Click Modify. and when the snap displays. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click once to specify the end of the pipe. and click to specify the end of the pipe.

double-click 3D. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Modify. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click Create Similar. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. verify that the slope is specified as 1.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. click Pipe. 20 Click Modify.00 for Slope Angle. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. and click OK.Plumbing to make it the active view. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. and on the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click Options. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing. and zoom in on the urinals. double-click 2. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.

Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. However. and on the Options Bar. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. specify 80 for D (diameter).Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. specify 80 for D (diameter). first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. double-click 2 . 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals.Plumbing to make it the active view. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 . 28 On the Options Bar. So.

and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. click to place the plug on the tee. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. 36 Select the vertical pipe. 35 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. click Pipe Fitting. specify 50 for D. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal.30 Select the elbow. and when the extension snap displays. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals.Plumbing to make it the active view. and in the Type Selector.

Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . 41 Proceed to the next exercise.37 Click Modify. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. 38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping.

click Options. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. If necessary. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 10 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. and in the Type Selector. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. 9 Click Apply. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. click Pipe. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. and specify 2700 for Offset. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. specify 0. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. click Pipe.rvt.00 for Slope Angle. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. specify 50 for D (diameter). and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. and click OK.

specify 2700 for Offset. 15 Using the same method. 14 Click Modify. use the Flip control to make the adjustment. 13 On the Options Bar. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.12 On the Options Bar. as shown. specify 50 for D (diameter). and click Apply. place another vent between the two rightmost urinals.

right-click the connector at the open end.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. 23 On the Options Bar. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. click Pipe. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. click Apply. and click Modify. and press Space. and click to specify the end point. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Draw Pipe. 25 Select the leftmost vent. right click the connector. and in the Type Selector. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. and click Draw Pipe. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. specify 3000 for Offset.

select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter). 31 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . click Apply. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 34 On the Options Bar. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector.28 Click Modify. click Pipe. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. specify 50 for D (diameter). 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and specify 2700 for Offset.

while maintaining a 90 degree angle. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Draw Pipe. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. 37 Drag the pipe preview.35 Click Modify. 36 Select the vent. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. right-click the connector at the open end. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously.

and click Properties. click Main.Plumbing to make it the active view. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. in the right pane. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 12 In the table. 3 Right-click Standard 2. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. and double-click 2 . click Branch. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. enter Hot Water for the new name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. click the Training Files icon. 11 In the left pane. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click Branch. 10 In the left pane. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. specify Tee For Tee. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. enter Cold Water for the new name.rvt. Create the Cold Water System | 323 .Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Right-click Standard 3. and in the right pane. 13 In the left panel. click Rename. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. 5 Right-click Cold Water. 9 In the table. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. and press Enter. click Rename. click View ➤ Piping. and press Enter. right-click Standard. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. click Main. specify None For Cross. and in the right pane. in the right pane. click Mechanical Settings. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition.

the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). select the domestic cold water connector. and click to specify the end the segment. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 While pressing Shift. and in the Type Selector. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. click the floor drain. and on the Options Bar. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify 750 for Offset. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 18 In the Filter dialog. verify that the slope is specified as 0. 20 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. click (Connect Into).00 for Slope Angle. and click OK. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. click Pipe. 324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. then select Plumbing Fixtures. and click OK. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and click to end the run as shown. 26 On the Options Bar. click Options. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. click Check None.

click the snap on the cold water pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 41 Drag the preview to the left. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. and click Apply. 35 On the Options Bar. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . click Pipe. and click to end that segment. select the cold water pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe. 42 On the Options Bar. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. (If necessary. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. 39 On the Plumbing tab.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. click Pipe. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. 32 On the Plumbing tab. specify 600 for Offset. 36 Click Modify. specify 2600 for Offset. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets.

47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. click Pipe. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.43 Click Modify. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click the + control to change it to a tee. 44 In the Project Browser. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 48 On the Plumbing tab. select the rightmost toilet. double-click 3D. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into).Plumbing.

and click the vertical cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar click . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 52 Select the leftmost toilet. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. 51 Click Modify. . 50 Drag the preview to the left. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee. and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 53 Select the rightmost urinal. 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.49 Click the open connector on the tee.

58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 56 While pressing Shift. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is).All of the cold water piping is in place. as shown. drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. 57 On the Options Bar. and then select the horizontal segments as shown. feeding the toilets (including the tees. 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. specify 50 for D (diameter). F8.

Create the Cold Water System | 329 . 62 On the Options Bar. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close.59 On the Options Bar. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). 64 You can save the open file if you wish. specify 20 for D (diameter). 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. specify 40 for D (diameter).

13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. and click OK. and click to place the water heater as shown.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. select Plumbing Fixtures. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. 66 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. click Plumbing Fixture. and on the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. create the hot water system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. and click View ➤ Piping. and zoom in on the sinks. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Check None.Plumbing. click the Training Files icon. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater. 5 In the Filter dialog. click the title bar for the browser. to the left of the main cold water pipe. click (Filter). double-click 2 . click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater.

and click Finish System. click (Connect Into).14 In the System Browser. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. expand Domestic Cold Water. click (Edit System). and click Finish System. and click Select. 20 Select the water heater in the view. click Add to System. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 On the Edit System tab. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20. 16 On the Edit System tab. select the water heater in the view. click (Edit System). and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. expand Domestic Hot Water. right-click the connector. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. and click Select. click Add to System. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. select the water heater in the view. and on the Options Bar. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. and click the main cold water pipe. 18 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. 17 In the System Browser. 15 On the Options Bar.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click Pipe. specify 800 for Offset. 30 On the Options Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. specify 2550 for Offset.23 On the Plumbing tab. click when the hot water connector displays. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 28 On the Plumbing tab. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. and in the Type Selector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 27 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 25 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. click to specify the starting point for the pipe.

expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views.Plumbing. 40 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Options Bar.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and click the hot In this case. and on the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the segment. Create the Hot Water System | 333 . 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. click water pipe below the sinks. 33 Click Modify. click Apply. and click to end that segment. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. 39 Click Modify. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click Draw Pipe. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. specify 800 for Offset. (Connect Into). click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. double-click 3D. 36 Right-click the open connector.

43 Click Modify. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing. 44 In the Project Browser. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Pipe. and click. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. double-click 2 .41 On the Plumbing tab. 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.

and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. you can choose to save your work. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.autodesk. If the tutorial datasets are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. As you create the systems. At the end of this tutorial. However. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. 335 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. methodology. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. you will understand the process.Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow.

and click Rename. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. insert fittings.Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 With the 2 . and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. 6 Click OK. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems.Fire Prot view active. you modify the view properties. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. naming it 2 . A new view called Copy of 2 . 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. enter Fire Protection. and click OK.Fire Prot for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. Next. and click View Properties. In this lesson. naming it 1 .Mech. During the fire protection design process. For Sub-Discipline. right-click the view named 2 . and finally. TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. right-click Copy of 2 .Fire Prot.Ceiling Mech view. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms.Ceiling Fire Prot. naming it 3D Fire Prot. 3 Enter 2 . TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. create schedules. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. manually modify the pipes and fittings. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and size and tag the pipes. under Graphics. verify that Mechanical is selected. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. you create views and pipe types. Then. Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. right-click in the drawing area. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. 7 Using the method that you just learned. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. You create views and pipe types.

16 With the Type Properties dialog open. and click OK. 10 In the Type Selector. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. modify. the command in progress terminates. Next. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. click Modify. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. TIP When you click Modify. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. under Mechanical. NOTE You can also create. and click OK. and click Fire Protection. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. You can also press Esc. for Material. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. Next. select Main. enter Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Fire Protection Wet. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. right-click the Design Bar. Next. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. click Duplicate. 14 For Name. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. select Carbon Steel. click Mechanical Settings. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . you modify the pipe type properties. click Pipe. 22 For System Type.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. including the new material property. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. In the Project Browser. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). 23 Under System Type. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. click Duplicate. Next. 8 In the Project Browser. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings.

This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that 2750 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. verify that 2750 is selected. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Next. 29 Enter ZR. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. or architecture. For Offset. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). For more information. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. duct. structural beams. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Branch. So. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. 27 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active.■ For Offset. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 25 For System Type. 26 Under System Type. However. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. refer to Help. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. double-click the 1 .

enter 0. click Pipe. if you reopen Revit MEP. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. 33 On the Options Bar. for Offset. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. enter 6400. For Offset. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. 32 In the Type Selector. You will need to reactivate it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. do the following: ■ ■ For D.30 On the View toolbar. The new pipe displays. select 150 mm. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar.

select Fine for Detail Level. Next. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. using this information. Scroll. Then. First. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). For example. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. 40 If you want to save your work. you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view.TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type measurement symbols. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. 36 In the Project Browser. As you place the sprinklers. you place the sprinklers. use the Zoom. navigate to the folder of your choice. Finally. In the next exercise. you created new views and modified view properties. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. 41 In the Save As dialog. just enter the value. and press Tab. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. However. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click Save. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. you can choose to save your work. 38 On the View toolbar. click (Dynamically Modify View). you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms.

Open the m Placing Sprinklers. click Schedule/Quantities. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. For Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Formula. do the following: ■ Under Category. and click Remove. enter Area/12. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Sprinklers.1. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Click OK. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. 4 While pressing Ctrl. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. 6 Select a field. click the Training Files icon. enter Min. under Available fields. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. select it. and click Add. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. To remove a field. select Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.1 square meters. For Type. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. Verify that Formula is selected.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. verify that Number is selected. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Rooms. verify that Common is selected.

This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. including spaces. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). click Field Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Min. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. select Level 2. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. verify that (none) is selected. Next. For And. Click OK twice. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. select 2 decimal places. sorted according to room number. and double-click 2. Sprinklers. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number. select Fixed. A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. 13 In the Format dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 15 Enter ZR. Verify that equals is selected. For Rounding. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. select Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). Verify that Ascending is selected. Under Level. select Min. verify that (none) is selected. 9 Click OK. For Then by. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. For Field formatting. For Units.

verify that Lines is selected. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared. click Name. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles.Next. click to specify the line start point. click Lines. and after the intersection snap displays. and after the intersection snap displays. 17 In the Work Plane dialog. and specify Level : Level 2. under Specify a new Work Plane. 19 On the Options Bar. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . 18 Click OK. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. For Plane. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. click to specify the line end point.

Notice that the Lines tool remains active. draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile.The line is created. and click View Properties. The line displays. right-click in the drawing area. under Graphics. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 25 Using the same method. 22 With the Lines tool active. However. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. for Underlay. 24 Click OK. a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. select Level 2.

28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Options Bar.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. you place a sprinkler. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . click to place the sprinkler. and after the mid point snap displays. click Sprinkler. 31 With the view zoomed. Next. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent.

and click View Properties. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. select None. for Underlay. 33 While pressing CTRL.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. you delete the reference lines. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. Next. and then press Delete. click (Copy). 37 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE When placing sprinklers. The selected sprinkler displays in red. Next. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. Next. The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. click both reference lines. you delete the reference lines. 34 Right-click in the drawing area. select the sprinkler that you placed. This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . under Graphics. you continue placing sprinklers.

41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. click to specify the copy start point. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. and that Copy is selected. and after the intersection snap displays. 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared.Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 38 On the Options Bar. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor.

and select Multiple. Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 46 On the Options Bar. 45 On the Edit toolbar. verify that Copy is selected. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). and after the intersection snap displays. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). click (Copy). Next. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 47 In Office 6. click to specify the copy start point. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected.TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 43 Enter ZR.

48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 . specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.

and after the intersection snap displays.49 Move the cursor directly down. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . click Modify. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. 51 While pressing CTRL. You first specify an array start point. Furthermore. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 53 On the Options Bar. you can use the Array tool to finish the job.The sprinklers are placed. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. For Move To. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. it is an ideal situation to use an array. to specify array end point. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 52 On the Edit toolbar. click (Array). select Last. creating an array is a 2-step process. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). 50 On the Design Bar. Next.

click to specify the array start point. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid.54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click to specify the array end point as shown. and after the intersection snap displays. and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 .The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. you place sprinklers in Office 8.

click Check None. and click OK.57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. 58 On the Options Bar. 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . drag the cursor to the lower-right. 59 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. select Sprinklers. and draw a pick box around Office 6. Notice that all elements in the 2 .

clear Multiple. or by selecting individual components.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. 61 On the Options Bar. click (Copy). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 60 On the Edit toolbar. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. click to specify the copy start point. by cross-picking (drag right to left). 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. and after the mid point snap displays. or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. you can clear it by filtering. you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). If the selection contains an unwanted component.

and after the mid point snap displays. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8. enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. click to specify the copy end point.

66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . 67 On the Edit toolbar. Next. you place sprinklers in the large common space. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown. Open 2. Open 2. and after the intersection snap displays. verify that Multiple is cleared. 68 On the Options Bar. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. Remember to watch for the intersection snap. click (Copy).

but creating an array is quicker. For Move To. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. 74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. For Number. enter 6 for the number of arrays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. click (Array). You could copy sprinklers. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 73 On the Options Bar. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 72 On the Edit toolbar.The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. Next. select 2nd.

This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. If you make a mistake placing the array. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. click to specify the array end point as shown. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point. For more information about arrays. refer to Help. you create multiple arrays based on this array. 76 While pressing CTRL. The array is created. undo the step and try again. Next. Zoom out to display the array. and after the intersection snap displays.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. For Number. verify that 2nd is selected. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click (Array). For Move To. click to specify end point for the second array. and after the intersection snap displays. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid.If you need to remove an object from a selection. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. 78 On the Options Bar. 77 On the Edit toolbar. enter 4 for number of arrays.

These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. you need to load them in the project. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. Because this room does not have a ceiling. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. first. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. However. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. To modify a family type. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. you will use non-hosted sprinklers. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset).The arrays are created. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles).rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. click the Training Files icon. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file.

88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. enter 2900 mm. enter ZR. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 93 On the Options Bar. and using the listening dimensions for reference. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. 94 In the Element Properties dialog. 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. 95 In the Project Browser. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select both sprinklers. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. click Sprinkler. move the cursor toward the right wall. and click Element Properties from the context menu. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. Next.Ceiling Fire Prot. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. and while pressing CTRL. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room.Fire Prot to make it the active view. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. click (Properties). and click OK. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. You can also right-click.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. you change the sprinkler offsets. under Constraints. for Offset. and double-click 2 . 87 In the Type Selector. 91 In the Project Browser.

snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. click File menu ➤ Save. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. In this exercise. 97 If you want to save your work. navigate to the folder of your choice. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and click Save. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. 98 In the Save As dialog.

If the System Browser does not respond. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. During this exercise. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. click the Training Files icon. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. click System Browser. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. you also convert and place pipe fittings. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and physically with piping. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. click in the drawing area to make it active. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. After creating the logical connection. However. a Default system category would not contain any system components. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. after you placed the sprinklers. In the next exercise. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. modify pipe branches.Fire Prot to make it the active view. sprinklers. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. then press F9. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 1 In the Project Browser. if all system components are assigned.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. it would be considered empty. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. and double-click 2 . Thus. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. So. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Unlike logical connections (systems).

Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. select Sprinklers. 6 On the Options Bar. Notice that all elements within the 2 . click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 7 In the Filter box. and click OK. click Check None. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable.

Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. Notice that after you click . click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. and will be considered empty. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. After you assign the remaining sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 8 On the Options Bar. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system.

Click (Next Solution). and click Select. and click Select to select the system. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Next. press Tab. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . This listing represent the system that you just created. right-click Fire Protection Wet. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and select solution 2. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. After placing a system component. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. expand Piping. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 14 On the Options Bar.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected.

17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 15 On the Options Bar.Next. select Branch. verify that Main is selected. you modify the layout path. click Modify. or architecture. 20 Click OK. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. 18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. For Offset. structural beams. click Settings. verify that 2750. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. A drag control displays. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .0 is specified. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Next. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. duct. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.

click Finish Layout. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.24 Using the drag control. drag the main to the left as shown. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 .

you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. and are not part of the system.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. Either relocate the system components. 27 Enter VG. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and the system remains. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. Next.

and Windows. Under Visibility. Stairs. The building elements are hidden. Walls. and after it highlights. Railings. Floors. Doors. Roofs.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. 29 Click OK. Ceilings. and click to select them. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 . 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. Lines. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red. Rooms. enter ZR. clear Casework.

the logical (system) connection is still intact. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. 35 Enter ZR. 34 Enter ZF.32 While pressing SHIFT. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements. Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. to zoom out the view to fit the window. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection.

Notice that 2 plus signs display. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls.Next. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 .

This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 38 Select the tee fitting. A minus sign displays.

40 Select the elbow fitting. 39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting.TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. and click the left plus sign. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 .

NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. use the end point snap. 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. use the connector snap. . When drawing pipe. or equipments. and after the end point snap displays. . If you pause briefly. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. pipe fittings. click to specify the pipe start point. 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. When connecting pipe to some elements. if a connector snap does not display. click Pipe. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Next.

you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. TIP When drawing pipe. 46 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected.45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 . and as the listening dimensions display. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar.

50 On the Options Bar. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view.The pipe segment is created. and after the pipe segment highlights. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. click (Connect Into). Next. press Tab 3 times. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. The sprinkler connects into the pipe.

You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. you can click to select them. indicating that they are physically connected. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. click to select them. fittings. you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. When pipes and fittings are connected. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists. The first time you press Tab. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. press TAB the required number of times. Next. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. allowing you to better see the connections. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. and equipment. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. and after the objects highlight. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. you validate the piping geometry. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . zoom in on the pipe and fittings. If the entire network does not highlight. 52 Using the same method.

right-click. clear Sprinklers.Fire Prot to make it the active view. double-click 2 . under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click Delete. 57 In the Filter dialog.Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser. 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. and after it highlights. 56 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted.

and after it highlights. 60 Click to select the branch. 63 On the Options Bar. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. 64 In the Filter dialog. including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. clear Sprinklers. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. 61 With the branch selected. and click OK. and after it highlights. select the highlighted pipe branch. click . place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. 62 While pressing CTRL. Both selected branches display in red.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch.

67 On the Options Bar. clear Sprinklers. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. click . 68 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. Next. Next. 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2.

and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. 72 In the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. and after the centerline snap displays. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector.70 In Open 2. click to connect to the sprinkler. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. 73 Zoom the view.

you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. 78 Using the same method. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 77 On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). Next. and press TAB twice. Next. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected. you check connectivity. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch.

and then click to select the highlighted objects. These sprinklers are not physically connected. However. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. and after it highlights. press TAB twice. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 . notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. including sprinklers and pipe fittings. You need to connect these sprinklers.The entire pipe branch highlights. Next. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. 81 Check connectivity. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. you make additional pipe modifications.

you can click to select all highlighted objects. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. and sprinklers display in red.The connected main. and after the connector snap displays. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. The highlighted objects display in red. This indicates 2 disconnects. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. the connection continues to display for easy reference. 84 Enter ZR. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. branch. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. making them easier to view. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. You need to resolve the disconnects. If you move the cursor.

Instead of dragging the pipe connector. NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect. 88 On the Options Bar. select the object as the trim/extend start point. 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. As always. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. click (Trim/Extend).TIP When dragging a pipe connector. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect. or in resolving disconnects. First. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 .

Next. The main and branches highlight. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar. you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run.The 2 pipe segments connect. indicating that they are connected. 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 93 Check connectivity. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. TIP When you tile 2 views. the active view is the only open window. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. the active view is tiled to the left. enter ZR. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. including the sprinkler to the right.Fire Prot view active. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 . 95 With the 2 . 96 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. Note that if this option is unavailable. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. Next.

and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. click Pipe Fitting.Fire Prot view. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. and after the mid point snap displays. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. 103 In the Type Selector. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 100 In the 2 . you place an endcap on the tee. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. select Fine for Detail Level. Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog. select the elbow. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. 104 Zoom in on the tee. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. click to place the endcap. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Next. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. First. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard.

106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. press TAB once. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 . 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view. validate the endcap geometry. 107 Place the cursor over the endcap. and after it highlights.

392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click OK. 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. their connectors are located in their actual location. However. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. in single line display. 113 In the Filter dialog. So.Fire Prot view. 112 On the Options Bar. The sprinkler. The pipes and fittings display in single line. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting.109 In the 2 . As stated earlier in this exercise. Next. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium. and pipe fittings display in red. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. clear Sprinklers. click . you modify the sprinkler branch connection. pipe.

and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler. 117 In the 2 . and after the connector snap displays. zoom in and select the left pipe segment. 116 On the Options Bar. You need to resolve the disconnect. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch.Fire Prot view. click . The sprinkler connects into the pipe.115 Select the sprinkler. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right.

Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . You will check connectivity later in this exercise. You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room. You resolved the disconnect. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . However. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). and press Delete. Next.Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. you remove the pipe above Server Room 32.Fire Prot view. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. 120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32.

and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. 123 Zoom out.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. and check connectivity. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run. Next. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. convert the tee to an elbow. This closes the left pipe segment end. 121 Enter ZR. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control.

finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 124 In the 3D view. Next.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. validate the pipe geometry. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. you connect the lower conference room sprinklers.

or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name. 128 In the 2 . and number of elements in the system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. boilers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. radiators. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 131 On the Options Bar. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. verify that 30 is specified. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). For Number of Elements. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.Fire Prot view. such as VAV boxes. mechanical equipment. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. verify that None is specified. and pipe or duct is created. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. Select Multiple. and then you create piping to physically connect them. fitting. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. close the 3D Fire Prot view. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. and maximize the 2 . This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). check connectivity. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. For System Equipment.Remember to resolve disconnects.Fire Prot view. and AC units. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. click Add To System. system equipment. Next. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. air terminals. select a pipe segment. you can select the pipe or duct. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar.

398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. 134 On the Options Bar. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). The selected sprinklers display in red. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. You cannot select them. click Finish System.This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. click Finish.

you confirm the system in the System Browser. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. click System Browser. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and click Expand All. expand Piping. 139 Under Systems. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. Next.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. right-click Fire Protection Wet. and click Select.

TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. After placing system components. Next. and select a newly added sprinkler.The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. 144 On the Options Bar. not piping which is the physical connection. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. The Layout Path tool activates. NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. verify that Solutions is selected. you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Click . ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and select solution 5.

do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. verify that 2750. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise. 146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset. Next. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.0 is specified. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 150 Click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. verify that Main is selected.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Settings. click Finish Layout. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . 145 On the Options Bar. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run.

Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. Remember to resolve disconnects. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. and validate the geometry. check connectivity. this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. you complete the pipe run. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. Next. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. 402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

click the Training Files icon. Finally. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. Open the m Creating the Dry System. you create the dry fire protection system. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. and click Save. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. 154 In the Save As dialog. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. In this exercise. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Connectivity was checked.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. In the next exercise. As with the wet system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . click (Copy). 153 If you want to save your work. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. After creating the system. and double-click 2 . click File menu ➤ Save. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. 1 In the Project Browser. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR. 4 On the Edit toolbar. navigate to the folder of your choice. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.

click to specify the copy start point. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .5 On the Options Bar. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. 7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. Verify that Copy is selected.

Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. The System Browser opens.9 Click Modify. Next. select both sprinklers. 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Under Systems. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. Next. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. click System Browser. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. you change the sprinkler type. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 10 While pressing CTRL. while pressing CTRL. 14 In the drawing area.

for Slope Angle. click Pipe. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Next. You have confirmed and validated the system. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. double-click 2 . verify that 2750. verify that 15mm is selected. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. and so on. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. and for each sprinkler. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The sprinklers are logically connected. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. right-click. and click Select The selected system displays in red. 23 On the Options Bar. For Offset. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. click Options. and after the intersection snap displays. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. you can view system information including flow. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. In the System Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. 22 In the Type Selector. sprinkler size. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. and click Select.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter 0.15. and click OK. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32.0 is specified. Next. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Each selected sprinkler displays in red. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. click the sprinklers to it. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter).15 On the Options Bar.

and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. click . Next. 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. 30 On the Options Bar. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 .

35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. expand 3D views.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 31 Zoom the view. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. click Options. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe. To follow good design practice. and press TAB 3 times. 37 On the Edit toolbar. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. Next. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. Next. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Create Similar). You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. under Fire Protection. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. indicating that they are connected. 38 On the Options Bar.

This clears the slope. First. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. or by right-clicking a connector. After the system was completed. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Sprinklers. select Family and Type. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . do the following: ■ Under Category. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry.39 In the Layout Options dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. navigate to the folder of your choice. Then. if you use the Create Similar tool. and click Add to add the field to the list. checked pipe connectivity. . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. In this case. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you placed dry system sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. select Count. 42 Check connectivity. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. You have completed the dry fire protection system. enter 0. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. However.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. for Slope Angle. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and click Save. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. Additionally. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. In this exercise. 43 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. and click OK. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. under Available fields.

Next. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule. TIP When you tile 2 views. 9 In the Project Browser. Next. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays.If you need to remove a field from the list. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. and double-click 2. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. and that it is sorted according to family and type. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. select it. and clear Itemize every instance. you modify the pipe diameters. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. select Family and Type. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. For Then by. 5 Select a field. and click Remove. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. verify that (none) is selected. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. Select Grand totals. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session.Fire Prot to make the view active. Verify that Ascending is selected. the active view is tiled to the left. Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window.

draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. or width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. and click OK. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. width. click . Changing the diameter.Fire Prot view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . and while pressing SHIFT. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. or height. click Check None. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 14 In the Filter dialog. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. height.

All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. you modify the diameter the main. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. Next. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. and press TAB twice. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. verifying that it is connected. select 25mm. For D: (diameter).16 On the Options Bar. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. 412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 .NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. and the supply pipe. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. If branch segments are selected. The selected main pipe displays in red. while pressing CTRL. the pipe fittings. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. 20 With the main selected.

24 In the 3D view. 23 On the Options Bar.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. 22 In the 3D view. select 100mm. so you need to exclude the supply pipe. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. while pressing SHIFT. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. especially around the pipe fittings. verify that the diameter is 150mm. and on the Options Bar. select the supply pipe. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. 414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . for D:. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry.

28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main.Fire Prot view to make it active. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. 27 Enter ZR.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. you will complete the branch diameter modification. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red.Fire Prot view. zoom in on the branch that you modified. Click Tags. 29 On the Options Bar. Next. 30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. Next. Later in this exercise. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for D:. The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. and 2 in the open space). 38 Click OK. and click to select them. for D:. 31 On the Options Bar. under Category. This segment services 5 sprinklers. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded. The pipe diameter is modified. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. you continue to modify the pipe branch. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. for D:. 36 On the Options Bar. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You can verify this selection in the 3D view. 33 On the Options Bar. Clear Leader. click to place the tag. select 50mm. and after the segment highlights. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . select 40mm to comply with the design criteria.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. for Pipes. click Tag ➤ By Category. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. 37 In the Tag dialog. select 40mm. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings.

40 On the Options Bar. 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. you place a tag and include a leader line.NOTE Tags are view specific. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. Next. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). Next. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. They display only in the view in which they were placed. and finish placing the pipe tags. select Leader. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 .

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Finally. In this tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. each system was completely different. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In the lesson. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and finish tagging the pipes. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 2 3 4. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. you tagged the pipes. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. In this exercise. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. Finally. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. and click Save. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. Sprinklers Serviced 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files.

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. exterior fire stairs. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. and a roof garden. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 419 . We wish to thank BNIM Architects. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.

NOTE For training purposes. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 . elevation. section.

you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.Creating Views In this lesson. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 9 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.

424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 Under Floor Plans. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. Next. and click 1: 1000. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click OK. click the current scale.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 .16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt.

select Elevation: Building Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Scale. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. select1:100.rvt. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Level 1.

8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter South East. and click OK. double-click South East. 11 In the Project Browser.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. under Elevations. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

and double-click Level 1. click Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. for Scale. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select Section: Building Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. 15 On the Options Bar.

drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . and click to place it. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Click the midpoint of the section line.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.rvt. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views | 431 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view .Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

and select the callout boundary. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and specify a point to complete the callout. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. double-click Level 1.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select 1:50. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

enter Enlarged Stair Plan. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 7 On the Design Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Creating Callout Views | 433 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

13 In the Type Selector. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Detail View: Detail. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. click Callout. for Scale. select 1:50. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. under Sections (Building Sections).Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. Creating Callout Views | 435 . under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser.

and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

12 For Section Tag. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. under Floor Plans. 15 Under Category. . and can be applied to the section line. select the section line. 10 On the floor plan. click Load into Project.rfa. and click Open.Custom. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab.rvt.Filled. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. select Section Head . double-click Level 1. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Custom-Section Head. Section Tail – Filled. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear any others. 4 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Section Head – Custom. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK twice. scroll to Section Line. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Section Head. select the current project. 8 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. Section Tail . Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. and click OK. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 .

27 Click OK twice. 22 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. For Line Weight. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. On the floor plan.5mm Square. and click OK. and select 2. On the floor plan. enter 12. and click Open. click Training Files. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK.5 mm. and on the Options Bar. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. scroll to Section Marks. enter 12. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select 12.5mm Square. for Elevation Tag. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. clear all others. 19 Click OK. select the current project. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select 3. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. click Duplicate. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click OK. 17 Under Category. select Custom-Callout Head. and select 3. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. select Square. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. .16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. notice the square elevation markers that display. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa.

47 Select Callout Leader Line. 49 Click OK. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. . click the Annotation Objects tab. select Dash. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. click Duplicate. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 For Line Pattern. for Callout Tag. For Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 4. select . 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. scroll down to Callout Boundary. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and on the Options Bar. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 40 Press ESC. click Edit/New. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. Click OK. enter . select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 39 Click OK twice. expand Callout Boundary.33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. 43 Under Category. 36 In the drawing. 46 Under Category. select the callout. and select 7.

To accomplish this. You learn to create view templates. under Elevations. and double-click East. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . view regions. and apply it to multiple elevation views. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. filters. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The crop region displays as red. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and visual overrides. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. masking regions.

10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 8 Click OK. 6 On the Project Browser. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Elevations. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. 13 Under Visibility. under Visibility. 5 On the View Toolbar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . right-click East. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. and click Properties. clear Entourage. click Zoom to Fit. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents.

14 Click OK. and click OK. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. Callouts. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. click Apply. and click OK. click OK. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Elevations. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the View Templates dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 16 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View Control bar. 19 In the Project Browser. right-click East. elevation markers. and click Create View Template From View. double-click North. levels. and click Apply View Template. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. grids.

NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.rvt. under Extents. Under View Depth.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. right-click. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range. for Bottom.rvt. click Edit. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. for Level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Penthouse.

8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. double-click Roof Plan. for Bottom. click Edit. select Roof Plan. under Extents. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. select Level 4. Click OK twice. select Level 4. for View Range. and click Properties. right-click.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. for Level.

16 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 .Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Lines. select Unlimited. click Modify. Under View Depth. 17 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. select Unlimited. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. click Region Property. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). under Extents. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. 13 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. for View Range. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region.

and click OK. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise.rvt. select Fire Rating. After you apply the filter. the fire rating of the walls. click the Filters tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. expand Floor Plans. 5 In the Filters dialog. under Filters. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. select Walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Rated Walls. click Edit/New. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Filters dialog. in this case. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Categories. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (New).

10 On the Filter tab. click Remove. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. click No Override. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. click Add. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Override under Patterns. 12 On the Filter tab. and click OK. To accomplish this. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 14 In the Color dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Basic colors. 16 Click OK. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. under Projection/Surface. for Color. Enter Hr. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.■ ■ Select contains. for Rated Walls. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . 9 Click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select the red color. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. for Pattern. 11 Select Rated Walls. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click OK.

448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 5 On the View menu. right-click. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.rvt. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Show Crop Region.

and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible lines. 12 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click (Rectangle). 9 On the View Control Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 449 . 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.7 On the View menu.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. click Finish Sketch. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.14 On the Design Bar. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. click the current scale. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Pattern. under Visibility. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Pattern Overrides. and click 1: 50. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. select Solid fill. click in the Patterns field. right-click. select Walls.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. for Color. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. and click OK. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override. click black. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. right-click. click No Override.

click Modify. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 .

click By Category Override. click Projection Lines. select Dash. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 In the Color dialog. for Pattern. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click OK twice. 29 In the Color dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 21 Under Projection/Surface. and click OK. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. click No Override. under Lines. right-click. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select a bright green color. click a purple color. 28 For Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog.

click Modify. click .30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 32 Select one of the lamps. right-click. 33 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . click . The hidden crop region is also revealed.

right-click. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. and click OK. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Sheets. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. select A0 metric.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click Sheet.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. For Sheet Name.Unnamed. 5 When the title block highlights. enter Site Plan. expand Sheets (all). Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 . For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar. and select the title block. click Modify. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. enter A101. 3 In the Project Browser. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .

For Project Status. for Project Address. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. enter 2007-1. For Project Number. 2007. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Project Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 14 Click OK. enter 15 May. under Other. enter J. For Client Name. The new project information displays in the titleblock. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. click Modify. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter Freighthouse Flats. 7 On the Design Bar. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. enter For Approval.■ Click OK.

Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . under Sheets (all). 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A105 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt.Layout Plan A104 . select the new sheet name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 2 In the Project Browser.Stairs In the following exercise. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Elevations A106 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. enter Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click A102 . click Modify. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. right-click. and click Save. and drag it to the sheet. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 17 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view. select Level 1.Sections A108 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric. for Name. you add views to these sheets.Floor Plan. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Elevations A107 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). align it with the East elevation. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.Elevations. and click to place it. 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation).The red border around the view no longer displays. click Modify. double-click A104 . and click to place it. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. click Modify. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 12 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click to place it. select 1:5. for View Scale. under Sheets (all). . and click OK.Sections. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 16 Select title bar. and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). double-click A107 .Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

zoom in to the grip. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . move the cursor over it. under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . under Sheets (all). click Modify. double-click Level 1. and click to place it.Stairs.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Under Floor Plans. and press TAB until it highlights. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet.

Sections. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click A107 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets (all). you must first activate the view on the sheet.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.rvt. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 .

and click Activate View. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. 6 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. enter 16700 mm. 7 In the Project Browser. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and press ENTER. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click. under Elevations (Building Elevation).2 Select the building section view.

right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. enter Title Sheet.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . select A0 metric. click Camera. and click Properties. 7 Place the camera as shown. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. After you create the sheet. and click OK. You modify the view to hide the view title. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 1.rvt. For Sheet Name. enter T. select the new sheet name. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 3 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The camera view displays. under Floor Plans.

enter 1500 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Under Camera.Title Sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter100000 mm. For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. 12 On the View Control Bar. 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Eye Elevation. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation. double-click T . Click OK. under Sheets (all).

The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. and click OK. click Modify. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. click Modify.15 With the view selected. Click Apply. select Scale (locked proportions). Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . enter 635 mm. for Height. for Show title. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Duplicate. click Size. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. on the Options Bar. . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. 25 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click Edit/New. Under Model Crop Size. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and then click OK. 24 Click OK twice.

468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

such as room and window schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows. in your Revit MEP 2008 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. 469 . You also learn to create different types of schedules.

expand Floor Plans. click Room Separation. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. click Training Files.Level 1. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Because of the open style floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click Room and Area.Tagging Objects In this lesson. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 . move the cursor to the right.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and click to place the room and tag. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 In the Tags dialog. click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Room. and select the room tag. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar.rfa. indicating that it can be edited. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. The room tag number displays in blue. click Training Files.7 On the Design Bar.

and press ENTER. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Room. enter U18-1. enter Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click it. 18 On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 17 Click the room text label. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 .

20 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. enter Kitchen. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 21 Click the room text label. Dining. and press ENTER.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2.

and click OK. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. in the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Model Categories tab. click Modify. and moving clockwise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. expand Lines.rvt. double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans.rvt. clear Room Separation. 28 On the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 . you learn how to place door and window tags. 26 On the Design Bar. The rooms are already placed.Level 1. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. but they need to be tagged.Level 2. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. click Room Tag.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. click (Properties).2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. and press ENTER. enter U18-2. for Mark. click Modify. under Identify Data. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter U18-1. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. and on the Options Bar. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. select Door Tags.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. under Category. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 .Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar.

20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Training Files. select Window. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Load. expand Floor Plans.rfa. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 In the Tags dialog. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK.

and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and modify the tag placement and display.rvt. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 25 Under Floor Plans.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.rfa. double-click Level 2. 4 Select a dining room chair. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Level 1. select Leader. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . and click OK. click Yes to load a tag. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 27 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View toolbar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 28 Select Window Tags. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Zoom flyout. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.

12 Click the elbow control. 14 Click Modify. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 9 Click Modify. 13 Optionally. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 11 Select the tag for the table. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it above the chair tag. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. and on the Options Bar. clear Leader.

click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click (Filter Selection). Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.Level 2. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. 20 On the Options Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and on the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 481 .

482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn to add schedules. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. click Check None. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.21 In the Filter dialog. select Furniture Tags. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector. and click Modify.

Next. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in which windows are listed by window type. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. click Training Files.rvt. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. that is. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. a schedule that lists every window in the building.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 .

and double-click Level 1. select Comments and click Add. 6 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Windows. right-click in the Design Bar. enter Building Window Schedule. 9 Click OK. and click OK. click the Fields tab.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 4 For Name. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View.

NOTE By clicking Show. for Sort by. for Sorting/Grouping. this can be a time-consuming process. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. and on the Options Bar. in large building models with many views. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. select Type Mark. click Close. and click View Properties. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. However. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. right-click the schedule. under Other. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Edit. and click OK twice. click Show. If no open view shows the selected element.

under Floor Plans. clear Itemize every instance. double-click Level 2. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. under Other. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. and press ENTER. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. The window type schedule is displayed. click Edit. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. sorted by type mark.The window schedule is displayed. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. and click View Properties.

select Construction. For Group parameter under. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. jamb. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 . and sill conditions for a window can be found. you cannot use them to tag objects.rvt. select Type.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. For Discipline. unlike shared parameters. click Add to create the new parameter. expand Schedules/Quantities. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. enter Head Detail. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 5 Click OK. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and double-click Building Window Schedule. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Parameter Data. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In this case. click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

enter Window Details. for Fields. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Jamb Detail. and click Properties. under Other. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 14 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. select Head Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and Sill Detail. and while pressing the left mouse button. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select the following fields. right-click Building Window Schedule. under Available fields. click in the Head Detail header. click Edit. click Group. so that they are listed before Comments.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK twice.

click Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Level 1. For example. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. enter 1/A107. Enter U18 in the third field.rvt. Select contains in the second field. enter 3/A107. Under Name. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. select Doors. for Jamb Detail. Verify Schedule building components is selected. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select the following fields. 6 Under Available fields. for Head Detail. 4 Click OK. enter Unit 18 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . enter 2/A107. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. under Type Mark A. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 . This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. You then hide the column used for the filter. and for Sill Detail.Door Schedule. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Verify the Phase is Phase 1.

and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting. and click OK. select Family and Type. click Modify. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). expand Sheets (all). 9 Click the Formatting tab. but is not included as a column in the schedule. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only.Unit 18. 15 On the Design Bar.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Fields. click Unit 18 . 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. and drag it to the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and double-click A102 .Door Schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Hidden Field.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 7 To the right of Header text. 19 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. 8 Click OK. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. select Rooms. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab.rvt. and click Add. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click in the Design Bar. under Category. select Number. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click Level 1. and click OK. 5 Using the same method. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. click Schedule/Quantities.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet.

For 102. for Name. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. next to Rows. for room 101. enter Corridor. add 5 more rooms. enter Storage. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The room Number is U17-9. and press ENTER. select Corridor. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 11 Using the same method.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 105. enter Building Entry. click New. For 103. and press ENTER. For 104. 101-106. select Storage.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 .■ For 106. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. For Room Separation. you add room separation lines.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the Lines field. In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and press ENTER. click the bright green swatch. place rooms from a program list. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Override. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In the Lines field. expand Lines. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Under Custom colors. enter Stair. For Weight. and modify room names. click the Color field. under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. double-click Level 1. click Room Separation. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select 9. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise.

click Modify. First. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. draw the horizontal line. 494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar. click Room.

13 For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. for Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. enter 2400 mm. select 102 Storage. for Room.

14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. double-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. 16 On the Design Bar. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Floor Plans. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

clear Room Bounding. under Available fields. under Category. Floor Finish. 26 Select Schedule keys. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click New to add a new row. enter Units. double-click Room Schedule. and click OK. 23 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click Schedule/Quantities. and for all 3 finishes. click (Properties). and click Add. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. while pressing CTRL. and Wall Finish. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Modify. under Constraints. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). 29 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 For Key Name.19 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Base Finish. enter As Selected. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 .

click (Filter Selection). 42 In the Filter dialog. and click Properties. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar. click Room Style. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Zoom flyout. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Zoom To Fit. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click Add.31 Using the same method. 36 In the Project Browser. under Other. and click OK. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 39 On the View toolbar. click Check None. for Available fields. click Edit. double-click Room Schedule. for Fields. select Units. for Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Room Schedule. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. 37 Under U17-8. under Floor Plans. All rooms are selected in the floor plan.

click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. under Identity Data. 8 Click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. enter Room Type. double-click Room Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Room Type. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Views (all). select Room Style. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service. select Units. right-click Level 1. click (Properties). 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog.43 On the Options Bar. 103. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. for Name. enter Room Type. select Public. for Room Style. and click OK. 104. at the warning prompt. 9 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click (Duplicate). Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and 106. and click OK. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Schedules/Quantities. 6 For Color. 45 In the Project Browser. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. click the Color Scheme field. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.rvt. and click OK. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. For rooms 102 and 105. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 1. and click Properties. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. under Floor Plans. 5 For Title. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram.

Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Color Scheme. and click OK. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. for Display Color Fill in. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and clear Room Separation. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Visible. select the color legend. expand Lines. and click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Foreground. click the value in the Color column.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Color Scheme Legend. 18 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select blue. click Edit. 22 In the Color dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Custom color.

Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . on the Options Bar. (Properties). 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 28 Under Title Text. under Graphics.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. 24 Click OK. click Edit/New. enter 25 mm. for Swatch Width. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. enter 5 mm. for Size.

2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.29 On the Design Bar. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.

11 Click the Formatting tab. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. For Then by. under Available fields. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Under Field formatting. select Calculate totals. and click Add. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area.EPDM. select Roofs. 12 Click OK. select Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. click Family and Type. 4 In the Type Selector. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.3 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Select Grand totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Material: Description. Clear Itemize every instance. under Category.

16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.40 50. 22 For Field formatting. 17 Click Calculated Value. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click Edit. for Name. and click Properties. and under Fields. select Calculate totals. 19 For Formula. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 24 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. 21 Click the Formatting tab. for the Material: Cost field.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Fields. and click Properties. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Material: Cost.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click Add. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. enter Estimated Cost. and click OK twice.80 5. click Estimated Cost. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 20 Click OK. under Other.

27 Click Field Format. creating a generic tag to tag the family. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 . and reporting the shared parameters. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. either within family components or within the project template. 28 Click OK 3 times. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. In this lesson. and schedule the total distance of each path. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. click Estimated Cost. and are defined and stored in an external file. click Training Files. you create an exiting plan for the building. regardless of category. For Rounding. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. click Edit.25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Fixed. You draw a travel path line. select 2 decimal places. under Fields. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. adding the shared parameters to a family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. For Units.rvt. tag the line. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Formatting. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a shared parameter file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters.

4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 9 Under Parameters. for File name.rvt. enter Exiting. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. and click OK. click Training Files. 7 Under Parameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. under Floor Plans. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. under Groups. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Length. 11 Click OK. click New. enter OfficeStandardsParameters.txt. click Create. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Travel Distance. for Name. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Path ID. You then create a generic tag to tag the family.rvt. and click Save. click New. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. for Name. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.

rfa. click Add. and click Select. 8 Select Instance. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. select Constraints. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . click Family Types. click Add.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. Click Training Files. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open. 11 In the Family Types dialog. enter Length. 14 If necessary. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. in the Load into Projects dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. click Load into Projects. following the equals symbol (=). for Travel Distance Formula. under Dimensions. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. group it under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. select Shared parameter. and click OK. under Parameters. and select Instance. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. 12 Click Apply. and click OK.rvt. under Parameters. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 13 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 7 For Group parameter under.

rft. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 24 On the Design Bar.rft. click Modify. click Select. click Add. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. 19 On the Design Bar.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Label. 26 On the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK 3 times. and click Open. click Training Files. select Travel Distance. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.

click Load into Projects. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 . Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.27 In the drawing window. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. and press DELETE. 30 In the Save As dialog.rvt is selected. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rfa.Tagging. and move it down. and click OK. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Placing. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. for File Name. Placing. After the lines are tagged. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and click Save. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. select Path ID. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 31 On the Design Bar. double-click Exiting Plan .Tagging. under Floor Plans.

5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. above the exterior door as shown.2 Zoom in to the corridor. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right.

7 Move the cursor down. 13 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click OK. 17 On the Options Bar.Level 2. and click (Properties). enter 1-1. for Path ID. Placing. click Component. 8 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category.Tagging. click Modify. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click outside of the building. under Constraints. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. through the door. 12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . verify that Chain is selected. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. double click Exiting Plan . under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar.

19 Move the cursor up through the door.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component. and click. move the cursor to the left. 22 Click at the center starting point. and click above the door to the stair. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor near the right corner.

click Modify. for Path ID. under Constraints. (Properties). and click OK.Tagging. 33 For Name. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click in the stair. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. enter 2-1. Placing. under Category.23 Move the cursor down. 28 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.

39 Clear Itemize every instance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculate Totals. and click View. and click Properties. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields. enter 2-. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Rename. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. under Schedules/Quantities. select Path ID and Travel Distance. right-click the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter 1-. click Edit. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 Click the Formatting tab. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 42 Click OK. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Travel Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. while pressing CTRL. 45 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. in the first field. in the second field. click Schedule/Quantities. for Filter. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. and in the third field. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID. and click OK twice. under Other. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter by. 44 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. 36 For Filter by. select Path ID. and under Field formatting. select contains. 43 In the Project Browser. in the third field. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. 38 For Sort by. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click Add. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK.

click the Value field.2 In the New Schedules dialog. under Categories. select the following fields.Fixed Partitions. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand C .Partitions . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 .Interiors\C10 . select Walls. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click the browse button. right-click Generic . click the Fields tab.152 mm. and click Properties. click C1010145 . 4 Under Available fields. for Assembly Code.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click OK. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK twice.

9 Under Directories. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 10 When the confirmation displays. click the File Data Source tab. under Database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 1 On the File menu. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 3 Click New. under Database Name.mdb for Database Name. click Training Files. enter Revit_Project. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. and click OK to create the database.rvt. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 8 In the New Database dialog. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Additionally. and click Next. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click OK in the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click Next. select a location for the database file. 10 Close the exercise file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 6 Click Finish.9 In the schedule. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Create. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and open the database in Microsoft Access.

Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. in addition to the Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects. 519 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.rvt. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Training Files.Relocating a Project In this exercise. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Relocating a Project | 521 .

In the Name dialog. and press ENTER. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. The levels in the project are not shared. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. If you did that now. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click (Properties). so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. 6 Click OK twice. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. select Shared. and double-click South. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. However. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 3 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 10 On the View menu. and click OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). for Elevation Base. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. The south elevation is displayed. Under Constraints. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Views (all).Shared Elevation. enter 10000 mm. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. By entering 10000 mm in this step. you specify the new location of the project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. enter8 mm Head . you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. By selecting the Level 1 line.

select Level : 8 mm Head . under Elevations. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 14 In the Project Browser.Shared Elevation. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. double-click North. as well as other views of the building model. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. 13 On the Design Bar.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. Relocating a Project | 523 .

524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select Levels 2-4.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. the Penthouse level. On the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. and the Roof Plan level.Shared Elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. permanent dimensions are created automatically. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. radial. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In Revit MEP. and angular dimensions. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Dimensioning | 525 . except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Dimensioning In this lesson.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. “Dimensioning” on page 525. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent.16 If you want to save your changes. multi-segmented. expand Views (all). You place linear. In this case.

and are created by selecting individual reference points. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. snap to wall centerlines. click Dimension. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. select it. By default. dimensions are aligned. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. select it.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.

click Dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. and click to place the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Modify.5 Move the cursor above the view. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 527 . The lock displays as locked. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar.

above the plan view of the building.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and select it. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 17 Move the cursor up. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. and select its left exterior face. 15 Move the cursor to the right. but below the first dimension that you placed. for Prefer. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. select Wall Faces. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. select the right endpoint of the planter. 11 Using the same method. select the right side of the curtain wall. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 12 13 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and specify a point to place the dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 26 Select the radial dimension. For Prefer. select Wall faces. Place a radial dimension with a Typ.19 On the Basics tab. click Modify. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Creating Dimensions | 529 . and select it.

34 Select the horizontal line. and click OK.. For Prefer. for Suffix. click Modify. verify Wall faces is selected.28 With the dimension still selected. click Dimension. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). click (Properties). 30 On the Basics tab. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter Typ. on the Options Bar. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. you select only the wall. and click to place the dimension. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . click Modify. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. 37 On the Basics tab. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and select Widths. click Dimension. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. select Entire Walls. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. select Wall centerlines.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click OK. Click Options. select Openings. 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. expand Views (all). For Pick. expand Floor Plans. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings.

rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. For example. When you place dimensions. for a multi-segmented dimension. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. and click to place the automatic dimension string. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . in some cases. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and double-click Level 1. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. expand Views (all). Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. 7 On the Basics tab. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. However. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . move the cursor down. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select the right edge of the planter. For Pick. and select it.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Individual References. 7 Using the same method.

select the bottom right endpoint. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. and select it. 11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 .

18 Press and hold SHIFT. select Wall centerlines. and when the wall centerline highlights.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. click Modify. select it. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. for Prefer. and drag the dimension down the wall. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 15 Moving the cursor to the right.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. and using the same methods. click Modify. 22 On the Basics tab. After you create the new family type. 20 Release SHIFT. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style.19 Release SHIFT. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 .

4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. select CityBlueprint. select Arrow 30 Degree. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . text font. enter Office Standard. and click OK. For Text Font. for Text Size. enter 3.2 mm.dimension tick mark. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. for Tick Mark. 5 In the Name dialog. 2 Click (Properties). Under Text. and select the lower dimension.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

select another font. and select the bottom dimension. 7 On the Basics tab. 10 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Modify. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. ■ Click OK twice.

create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540. select the angular dimension on the planter.11 Using the same method. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. and how to add leaders to the text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.

and click and drag to create a text box. click Text.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None).Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 . but below the upper dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. zoom to planter near grid line 5. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

10 In the Name dialog box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. click Edit/New. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. enter 6 mm. and click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. enter EXISTING BUILDING. for Text Size. select Arc Leaders. under Graphics. 7 Select the text box. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan.5 In the text box. 11 Under Text. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . If so. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. click Duplicate.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. and enter Planting Bed. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Modify. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 . click Text.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. Click Rename. for New. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). select Arrow 30 Degree. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. click Modify. select CityBlueprint. for Text font. Under Text. Click OK twice. 20 On the Design Bar. enter Standard Notes. for Leader Arrowhead. 24 On the Design Bar. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Modify. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Rename dialog. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. Under Graphics. click Edit/New. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders.

for Leader. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 26 In the Type Selector. over the Planting Bed text. click Text.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. click to place the text box. click (Arc).

32 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.31 Click in the text box. Wall. click File menu ➤ Save As. and enter 457 mm Conc. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .

using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard door header condition. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. 547 .Detailing 9 In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. plywood. and metal studs.

that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.rvt. In the callout view. you detail the view of the roof edge. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. as well as detail lines. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. They are also view specific. and insulation objects. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. In order to detail from the building model. Detailing the View In this exercise. You load detail components. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. you trace over the building model geometry. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After you add components. region objects. add detail components.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.

for Pattern ➤ Detail. 15 For Spacing.rfa. 8 Delete the component. click Edit/New. The roof overhang detail displays.5mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 549 . 5 In the alert dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. select As underlay. 7 In the drawing area. click . click Duplicate. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. and click Open. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click the detail callout head. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select Corrugated Metal. 17 In the drawing area.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Detail Component. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Exact location is not important. and click OK. 16 Click OK twice. enter 406. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.

click Detail Component. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 23 On the Options Bar. click (Move). 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click Load. and press DELETE. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Modify. ■ Click Modify.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.

and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click Training Files. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click OK. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. and place it in the detail view as shown. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 25 In the Type Selector.rfa.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Detailing the View | 551 . 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click Training Files. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 32 To properly orient the component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 31 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 30 On the Design Bar.

36 On the Options Bar. click Insulation. 39 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. and click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 38 Click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

select to near side. as shown. click Detail Component. For Offset. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. enter 140mm. 46 In the Type Selector.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Detailing the View | 553 . Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 43 Click Modify.

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. you add lines to your detail. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector. 4 Click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. and lock the component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 52 Click Modify. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. select Thin Lines. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Like detail components. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. click Detail Lines. they are view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.48 In the Type Selector. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector.rvt.

as shown. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 555 . For Offset. as shown. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 10 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. and press ENTER. For Offset.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Thin Lines. and clear Chain.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click (Draw). and draw the detail lines as shown. 18 In the Type Selector.

select Do not display. and click Properties. 24 On the View Control Bar. and press ENTER. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Vapor Barrier. 22 In the Project Browser. click Detail Lines. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select the Penthouse level line. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. enter 10mm. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Type Selector. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Adding Detail Lines | 557 . When you turn the display model off. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click.

30 In the Type Selector. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line.29 On the Design Bar. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. you add text notes to complete the detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 Click Modify. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. click Text. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component.rvt.

2 On the Options Bar. enter Typ. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Enter the text. for Text ➤ Suffix. click Dimension.. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 7 Select the dimension line. and click (Properties). Adding Text Notes | 559 . and click OK. 6 Click Modify.

rvt. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. while pressing CTRL. (Filter Selection). select a text note. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560.Keynotes. pressing TAB. and click Rename. click Roof Overhang Detail. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. and save the exercise file. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Select All Instances. on the Options Bar. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. right-click. 7 Click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. right-click. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. right-click. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and press DELETE. and selecting the chain. select all the coping linework. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and the component can be placed in the detail. 23 Using a window. select the coping. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for File name. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 18 In the Save As dialog. 14 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Training Files.Keynotes view is not the open view. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. While pressing SHIFT. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. 15 Use a window to select all linework. in the Type Selector. 21 To place the component. navigate to your preferred location. click Load into Projects. enter Roof Edge. 16 Click Modify. and click Open. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. Creating Detail Components | 561 . clear Detail Items. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Medium Lines. The original linework remains selected.rft. click . 22 Click Modify. and click OK. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 25 In the Filter dialog. click Detail Component.

click Load. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. you place keynotes on objects. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click OK. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click Open. Click to place the leader arm. 2 In the alert dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.rvt. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 63mm Rigid Insulation. and click Open. click Training Files. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 30 In the drawing area. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing .26 Press DELETE. click Training Files. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.B5. click Detail Component. 28 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. In the Keynotes dialog.rfa.

Roof Edge4. click in the Value column. Adding Keynotes | 563 . 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 6 Click Modify. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For the metal coping. use keynote 06160.C1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. use keynote 09250. 19mm Plywood. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 50 x 150.F1. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.D11. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties).D1. FasciaProfile_1. navigate to 07645. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.G1. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 200.D11. 12 On the Design Bar.F1. click Edit/New. select the metal fascia with drip edge.I1. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 07645. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06160. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.

Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Load into Projects. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Open. 6 Lock the line. click Lines. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing . for File name. You do this in order to keynote the component. and click Save. 22mm Corrugated Steel . click Training Files. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.A8. navigate to your preferred location.rft.14 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 17 Keynote the component.20 Ga. click Detail Component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 4 In the Type Selector. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. and click Modify. using keynote 07460. select Corrugated Metal. 5 In the drawing area. 15 In the Type Selector. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 18 Save the file. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. select the left end point of the reference line. 8 In the Save As dialog.

30 Click Modify. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. enter EPDM Membrane. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 22 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component.A1. 28 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. click in the Value column. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Load. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . m_Invisible Line Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 34 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. click the end points at the top of the roof. 31 Select the component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the component. 20 Click OK 3 times. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Duplicate. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. invisible. click Training Files. and click (Properties). You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Edit/New.11 Press DELETE. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Next. and click Open. 37 Click OK 3 times. 15 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and hidden) used in the view. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. 13 In the Type Selector. 29 In the drawing area. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK.

41 Select the component just added. 42 Using the same method used previously. 53 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 46 Click Modify. and assign it keynote 07260. 52 In the Type Selector.A5. against the 3/4" plywood. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 06110. click Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. and click . click Detail Component. 40 Click Modify. 47 Select the component. and click . 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. name the component 50 x 200 Framing.38 On the Design Bar. (Move). name the component Air Barrier.G1. and click the lower end at the break line. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component. 48 Using the same method used previously. 49 With the component selected.

and click . Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.55 Click Modify. 58 Using the method used previously. and assign it keynote 07260. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 50 x 200 Framing. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 60 On the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier.A4. 61 In the drawing area. leaving the detail component lines. and Vapor Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. Air Barrier.

add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 69 Using the method used previously. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.rfa. and press ENTER. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 70 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rvt. 63 In the drawing area. and press TAB.A4. select Invisible Lines. 67 In the drawing area.txt.. name the component Batt Insul. 68 Select the component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 3 In the text editor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and close the text editor. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector.rfa. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. click Detail Component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The database file opens in a text editor. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568. and assign it keynote 07210. select the component. Enter 07463. and click . Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit.A9. and press TAB. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click File menu ➤ Save. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.A1. 71 Save the file. Enter 07460.

10 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select Absolute. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click OK. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 13 Click Modify. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. After you create a drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click OK. under Keynote Table. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. and click Open. click to place the leader. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 11 Click Modify. under Path Type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.txt. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select all the keynotes. click Browse. you learn how to create a drafted detail.A1. In the Type Selector. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 9 In the drawing area. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. navigate to 07463. 14 Save the file. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. and click to place the note. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.

select 1 : 5. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Callout. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. enter EPDM Metal Coping.rvt. and click OK.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Click Open. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Rename View dialog.dwg. select Reference other view. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select Center-to-center. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select Black and white. and click Rename. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). For Layer/Level Colors. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.

delete the existing value. click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. and double-click the callout. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 10 In the Rename dialog. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The callout head no longer displays a reference label.No Reference. and click Properties. click Rename. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Detail . click Edit/New. 12 Click OK twice. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 6 Select the callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. for New.

double-click A105 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Elev. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Sect. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 18 Save the file.No Reference). so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise./Det. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select the width dimension. Draw a rectangle as shown. 11 In the Name dialog. and enter 20. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Board. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. . 19 In the Type Selector. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. click Region Properties. 5 In the Type Selector. enter Gyp. 17 Click Modify. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. for Name. click . click Detail Component. 14 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 16 Select the left edge of the region.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Gypsum-Plaster. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.5mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Finish Sketch. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Move the cursor up. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 24 Select the mirrored region.20 On the Design Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. and click above the top of the region as the end point. (Draw).

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. for Name. select Wood . click Duplicate. click . verify that the thickness is 19mm. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150.25 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 30 In the Name dialog. click Filled Region. Draw a rectangle as shown. click (Align). click Edit/New. and click OK. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. . in the Type Selector. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Wood . 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. 33 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.Finish.Finish. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

Site Plan/Floor Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . double-click A102 .■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. expand Legends. and click to place it. 18 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. under Sheets. 17 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it. expand Sheets (all).Unit 18. 16 In the Type Selector.

enter 900 mm. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 21 On the Design Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select1 : 50. select Viewport : No Titlemark. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.20 In the Type Selector. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. and press ENTER. and click OK. For Host length. click New ➤ Legend. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Name. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 6 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . click Legend Component. For View.rvt. select Section. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Medium for Detail Level. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 3 For Scale.

Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 10 Select the second wall.9 On the Design Bar. for Family. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.13 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text without a leader. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 19 Enter the following text.

double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Floor Plans. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. double-click Level 4. drag it onto the sheet. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. The open drawings are both visible. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 26 On the Design Bar. and click New Sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 4th Floor Wall Types.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. right-click Sheets (all). allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends. select Level 4. 23 In the Project Browser. 29 In the project Browser. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. click (Match Type).Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

35 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 37 Optionally. In this exercise. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 36 On the View Control Bar. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. contractor inquiries. or changes in building material availability. You can create a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. select Medium for Detail Level. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. These changes can be due to owner requests. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.

you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. click Revisions. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. If you select By Sheet. under Floor Plans. In general. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. enter a date. In most instances. When Issued is selected. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 7 Under Visible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 3 In the Revisions dialog.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. yet as concise as possible. if the active revision is number 1. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. If Visible is not selected. For example. 2 On the Settings menu.rvt.

and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. 5 Select the partition. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 Select the divider. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Move). you make changes to the project floor plan. including revision number and revision date. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .8 Click OK. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. double-click Level 4. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. click Revision Cloud.6 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 . 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved.

and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. double-click Level 4. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Line Weight. click Tag ➤ By Category. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . select 6.rvt. 16 Click OK. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you load a revision tag into the project. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Floor Plans. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.

Working with Revisions | 607 . You do this by issuing the revision. and because the revision is the first in the project. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Unnamed. under Sheets. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. you need to add one. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. scroll down to Revision Clouds. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.4 On the Options Bar. you prevent further changes to the revision. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. select Leader. 11 Click to place the tag. Because you chose to number by project.rfa. click Training Files. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. on which you place a revised view. click Tags. In the Tags dialog. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You then issue a revision. 6 Click Load. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. you create a sheet view in your project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click A107 . 8 In the Tags dialog. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 5 In the Tags dialog.

On the Settings menu. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . click New. for Visible. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. and click OK. click Revisions. select None for each issued revision. click Revisions. under Add. select Issued. you can no longer modify it. NOTE After you issue a revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. You can continue to add revisions. 6 In the Revisions dialog. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and place it on a sheet. click Training Files. under Sheets.JPG. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. such as images. and spreadsheets. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. text.9 Click OK. double-click T . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Title Sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. Importing Image Files In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. into a project.rvt. you learn to import information from other applications. Importing from Other Applications | 609 .

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. click Text. 6 Select the text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. under Sheets. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. double-click T . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click to add text without a leader.doc text file in another window. for Leader.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.5 On the Design Bar. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.JPG.rvt.JPG. enter Fixture Schedule. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. for File name. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Modify. under Sheets. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click Desktop.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. for Name. select the document writer. click Modify. 3 In Microsoft Excel.mdi. This step has been completed for you. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.Unit 18. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. This process may vary from system to system. This exercise demonstrates a common method. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click Training Files. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. with the new text box still selected. 5 Click OK. double-click A102 . 10 On the Design Bar. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. and click Save. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.xls. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 4 Under Printer. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. called dependent views. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project. 613 . you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 615 .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.Aviary. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. for Name. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. 6 In the drawing area. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 . The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

right-click Dependent on Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click (Hide Crop Region). 10 On the Zoom flyout. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Level 2. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. for Name. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 15 Select the crop region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 .Labs.9 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 13 In the Rename View dialog.

click Matchline. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click (Hide Crop Region). The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Modify. 20 On the Zoom flyout. 18 On the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 . 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 19 On the View Control Bar.

Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. and click. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 24 On the Design Bar.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

click Level 2 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. for Line Weight.Unnamed. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . click the Annotation Objects tab. 31 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 . and click OK. and click OK. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 27 Under Matchline. 33 In the Project Browser. select Double Dash.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select 9. enter Level 2 Aviary. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name.Aviary. 28 For Line Pattern. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. expand Sheets. and drag it onto the sheet.

verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . for Target view. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. and place the Level 2 . 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click View Reference. under Floor Plans.35 On the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. double-click Level 2. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar.Aviary is selected. 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Modify.

45 On the Zoom flyout. 44 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2 . for Target view. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 46 In the Project Browser. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click (Show Crop Region). NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Modify.Aviary. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. 47 On the View Control Bar.Labs.

Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. right-click. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. after modifying the annotation crop region. 49 If. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). click the far right control.48 Select the crop region. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 54 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 . New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). 53 In the Select Views dialog. expand Level 1. right-click Level 2. and click Apply Dependent Views.51 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 55 On the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans. and click OK.

5 In the drawing area. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. enter South Elevation . 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . The dependent view opens. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. 2 In the Project Browser.Left. and click Rename. expand South Elevation. and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Crop Region. click Training Files. The matchline is already placed in the view.

for Name.Right. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click OK.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 7 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 8 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. right-click South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. under Sheets. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click A103 Unnamed. click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the aviary. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click OK. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 16 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. click (Hide Crop Region).

Left is selected. click View Reference. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.18 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar.Right. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click South Elevation . under Elevations. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . click South Elevation .Left. double-click South Elevation. under Elevations. click Modify. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. for Target view. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. and drag it onto the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

double-click A103 . 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser.South Elevation.Right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 . click Modify. select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all). 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. for Target view.28 On the Options Bar.

and click Activate View. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .NOTE If the view references are not visible. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Right-click the view. Select the crop region.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

Viewing 12 In this tutorial. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. 633 . you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.

locate the Project Browser. click . including elevation and three-dimensional views. on the Standard toolbar. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views.rvt. and double-click East. expand Views (all). A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. and three-dimensional (3D) views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. You create elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. expand Elevations. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click Training Files. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. you learn how to access different views of the building model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. sections.

The default name of the view is {3D}. and click Hidden Line. 6 Under Visibility. the east elevation. click . Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Model Graphics Style. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. This change is applied only to the active view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. 7 Click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. This change is applied only in this elevation view. Exploring the Building Model | 635 .

expand Views (all). 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click My 3D View. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. The view follows the movement of the cursor. . and expand 3D Views. . and click OK. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. You can pan. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. zoom. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel.9 On the View toolbar. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. Move the mouse to pan the view. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and click Rename. under 3D Views. click to reorient the view. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. click X to close the view. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. enter My 3D View. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. right-click {3D}.

expand Floor Plans. m_Viewing_Exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. outside of the dimension lines. Cameras define the eye point. and click View. and distance from the target. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. click Camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. eye height. as shown in the following illustration. After you specify the second point (the view target).Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and double-click Level 1.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 5 On the View menu. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. down. click Dynamically Modify View. Press and hold the left mouse button. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. and sideways to see how the view changes. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. Move the cursor up.

Press and hold the left mouse button.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 13 On the View menu. height. and target 12 On the Window menu. click Tile. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 .

14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and click Show Camera.

Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. right-click. In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties.17 In My 3D View. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. under Camera. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Click OK. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. click to create a new 3D view. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. and click Shading. click Model Graphics Style. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. and move it to another location.

A section box is displayed around the model. 24 Click the section box.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. select Section Box. as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. click View Properties. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . under Extents. 22 On the View menu.

“Creating a Section View” on page 643. click Section. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and rotate the section box around the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Viewing_Exercise. and maximize this view. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View | 643 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.rvt.

double-click the section head. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and double-click Section 1. select the section view. 6 In the Project Browser. click Modify.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and click Open View. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. right-click. or in the Project Browser. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Go To View dialog. View the section 5 To view the section. and click Find Referring Views. 8 Select the section line. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. expand Sections.

click Modify. move the cursor around the building model. click Modify. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.9 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. m_Viewing_Exercise. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 12 Select the section line. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in section depth. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. double-click Level 1. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area.rvt. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. zoom in. and click. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation.a by default. 5 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1 . double-click Level 1. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Do not select the arrow. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Elevation 1 . 10 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .a. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. double-click Elevation 1 . 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. click Modify. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.b.b.

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . and open Common\c_Showroom. such as Brick on CMU. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.11 If you want to save your changes. roofs. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. floors. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. and applies to phasing override materials as well. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. in a compound wall. click Save As. where each layer is assigned a different material. and the insulation color to pink. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This includes walls. a shade of gray. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. For example. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and other families. in this case. such as the one below. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red.rvt. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the File menu. In addition. click Training Files.

A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. select Masonry . 2 On the Settings menu. 3 In the Materials dialog. click Materials. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. and click OK twice. expand Sections (Section Head . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. click Materials. and double-click 3D. select Masonry .Brick for Name. select red. 4 Under Cut Pattern.Filled). Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. expand 3D Views.Brick for Name. expand Views (all). Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. click Color. expand Views (all). View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Color dialog. 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . The surface pattern of the brick is black.Level 3. 9 In the Materials dialog. and double-click Wall/Floor Join .

Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 11 In the Color dialog. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. expand Floor Plans. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type.rvt. and double-click Level 1. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. click View Properties. expand Views (all).10 Under Surface Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. and click OK twice. click Color. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. c_Showroom. select white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

right-click. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. click Detail Level. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. and click Element Properties. 10 On the Design Bar. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. . and click OK. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. and click OK three times. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 2. By default. 12 On the View Control Bar. on the File menu. click Modify. and click Fine. 7 In the Color dialog. If you create more than one plan region in a file. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. click Edit/New. select Solid fill for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. 14 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. select a shade of gray. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine.

and you cannot control their visibility. line type.rvt. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.coincident edges. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . line color. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. refer to the online Help for more information. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. click Training Files.

expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. click Plan Region. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. the top and bottom clip planes. which is similar to the view range for plan views. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. view range. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Plan regions have a single property. right-click in the Design Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. and the view depth plane. and double-click Level 1. In the following illustration. click . You use the view range property to control the cut plane. click Lines. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. 3 In the Level 1 view. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the south elevation is also displayed. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. On the Options Bar.

click Modify. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 On the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . 4 Select the plan region. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. Press ESC to end the command. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. under Extents. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. click Edit for View Range. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. When you select the plan region. the line turns red. 6 In the View Range dialog. click Finish Sketch. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. top and bottom clip planes. 8 Click Apply. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1.■ ■ On the Design Bar. right-click. and then click OK twice.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. click Save As. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 10 If you want to save your changes. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing .

and posters. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. 655 . to place and render decals to create signs. billboards.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial.

When you complete these changes. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. you select a scene that defines the model environment. the floor. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . After you create the perspective view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.

click . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Wall. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. and click the tab in the context menu. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.Cavity Wall . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.rvt.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 9 Under AccuRender. click Materials.Brick. verify that Co-house . Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. click Edit for Structure. under Construction. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. select Masonry . 8 In the Materials dialog. 3 On the Options Bar.Brick. under Name. and click Edit/New. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .

under Name. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. select Site .Running. 12 Click OK twice.Asphalt. 21 In the Materials dialog. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 18 In the Materials dialog. 11 Under Name. 22 In the New Material dialog. 24 In the Material Library. 23 Under AccuRender. and click . 25 Under Name. under _accurender. select Polished. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. for Layer 2. 19 Click OK four times. expand Masonry and click Brick. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu.200mm. under Name. click Duplicate. Polished and click OK. under _accurender. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 26 Click OK twice. select Carib. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit for Structure. enter Aluminum. expand Metals. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. under Construction. click Materials. . click Edit/New. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 27 On the Design Bar.Plain. and click Aluminum.

select Exterior under Type. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. floor. 32 In the Materials dialog. click Region Raytrace. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. verify that New is selected. 33 Click OK three times. and then click . click No. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Polished. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. under Materials and Finishes. select Aluminum.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click . select the curtain wall mullion again. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Edit/New. click in the Material field. under Name. 29 On the Options Bar. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . and click OK.

when you render an exterior view of the model.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. and double-click 1st Flr. expand Floor Plans.rvt. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you place two different types of trees on the building site. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. producing a photorealistic effect. floor. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). Cnst. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. m_Cohouse. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). In a later exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. 38 On the Design Bar.

and click to place a tree. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select M_Tree .Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . select any of the deciduous trees. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. click Modify. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. click Site Component. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Site Component. and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector. Create a new type of tree. 7 In the Type Selector.9 Meters. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click .

and click OK. Black. and click OK twice. and then click display the Plant Library. m_Cohouse. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click in the Value field for Plant Name. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. 12 In the Plant Library. under Other. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. select Oak. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. as shown in the following illustration. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Identity Data. 13 Under Name.8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Black Oak for Type Comments. enter Black Oak. 15 Under Other. under accurender. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and place two black oak trees. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click Deciduous.

Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Cnst. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. view open. The new perspective view is displayed. Creating a Perspective View | 663 . Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.

The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. view. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. double-click 1st Flr. and click Show Camera. Cnst.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

date. you select a scene and specify time. m_Cohouse. enter Exterior. and click Rename. and environment settings that you use to render the view. right-click 3D View 1. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Exterior. and click OK.rvt. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. lighting. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. under Scene Settings. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 8 Under Time. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Time. click the Solar Angles tab. 6 Select By Date. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 7 Under Date. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click Settings. and click Sun.

9 Click the Place tab. 10 Click in the Cities list. click No. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.00 (many clouds. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Background Color. click . and click OK. and select Boston. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Raytrace. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Ground Plane. under Scene Settings. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. Dark. select Autumn for Plant Season. 17 Under Advanced. 19 In the Material Library. and enter bo. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Capture Rendering. 26 On the Design Bar. 13 Enter . The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. select Good for Quality. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.20 for Cloudiness. 16 In the Environment dialog. 20 In the Name list. select Grass. click Environment. 18 Click Material. click Site. 21 Click OK twice. and click OK. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. under _accurender. USA. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 27 On the Options Bar. 12 Click the Settings Tab. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. MA. 11 Scroll down.) 14 Click OK. Rye. click Image Size. under Scene Settings.

define the view and render scene settings. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. click Save As. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. Cnst. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. m_Cohouse. on the File menu. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.30 On the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and double-click 2nd Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Floor Plans. and finally.rvt. expand Renderings. To create the rendered scene.

select M_RPC Female: Cathy.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. click Component. Adding RPC People | 669 . 4 In the Type Selector. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.

670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. m_Cohouse.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

double-click 2nd Flr. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The interior perspective is displayed.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 . Cnst. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.

right-click 3D View 1. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click the dimensions for Size.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. and click Rename. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. enter 178 mm for Height. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. under Size. enter 229 mm for Width. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. under Extents. Grips are displayed on the section box. enter Interior. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click to display the 3D view of the building model. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 . select Section Box. and click OK. and click OK. 12 On the View menu. 14 On the Design Bar. and select the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model. click View Properties.9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. 11 On the View menu.

and click Save. and select Boston. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. select Interior. place. click the Solar Angles tab. 9 Under Time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 12 Scroll down. 8 Under Date. date. under 3D Views. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Time. and enter bo. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. on the Main tab. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Environment. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Background Color. select New. you reduce the rendering time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and click Sun. 7 Select By Date. 10 Click the Place tab. under Scene Settings. 13 Click the Settings tab. and click OK. 4 Under Type.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. under Scene Settings. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. you create a render scene to specify the time. 17 In the Environment dialog. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. click OK. and environment settings used to render the view. 11 Click in the Cities list. and enter Interior Scene for Name. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 14 Click Save. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. MA. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. m_Cohouse. specify a file location and name for the scene settings.rvt. USA. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. By limiting the geometry. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

You can select families with transparent materials. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Material. under accurender. 21 In the Name list.18 Under Advanced. select Grass. under Use View’s Section Box. Rye. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 24 Under Scene Settings. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. as daylight sources. m_Cohouse. click Site. select Ground Plane. click Daylights. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Interior. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. under 3D Views. select Summer for Plant Season. double-click {3D}. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. click Radiate. 22 Click OK twice. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. 20 In the Material Library. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. The Ground Plane tab displays. Dark. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. select {3D}. 5 On the Design Bar. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . such as windows and doors. click OK.rvt. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Curtain Wall 1).

click Raytrace. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. 9 If you want to save your changes. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.The radiosity process. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 On the Options Bar. which can take several minutes. on the File menu. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. begins. . select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 7 On the Design Bar. When radiate completes. click Save As. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. the following rendered view is displayed.

you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. click Settings ➤ Project Units. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. The walkthrough path is a spline. proceeds through the dining room. and ends in the far corner of the living room. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and change unit formats as desired. elevation. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. In a plan view. click Training Files. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. you must select or define a scene. and open Common\c_Townhouse. If you prefer to use Metric values. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or section view.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 .rvt. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model.

on the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. of the walkthrough. 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 On the Options Bar. or the first key frame. click Walkthrough. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click . expand Walkthroughs. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. expand Views (all). and click the tab in the context menu. and double-click 1st Floor. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.

and select the crop boundary. and click OK. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. click Edit Walkthrough. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. If it is not. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). select the crop boundary. verify Field of view is selected. 14 Click . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . 12 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 9 On the Options Bar.

proceed to the next exercise. under Extents. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 16 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. press ESC. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680.rvt. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Click . enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 1 for Frame. and click OK. c_Townhouse. clear Far Clip Active. click Edit Walkthrough. double-click 1st Floor. click .

Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path for Controls. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

9 On the Options Bar. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 2 In the Save As dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click OK. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded with edges. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. click Edit Walkthrough. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. hidden line. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. select <Shading> for Display mode.rvt. 3 Under Output Length. and then click to play the walkthrough. and click Save. double-click Walkthrough 1. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. without opening Revit MEP 2008.7 Click the third key frame position. 1 On the File menu. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. 4 Under Format. The AVI is recorded. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. or with AccuRender raytracing. under Walkthroughs. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. shaded. If you are unsure of what option to use. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. c_Townhouse.

7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 8 If you want to save this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. reducing the size of the image. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. on the File menu. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. click Save As. specifying the number of frames. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

685 . Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.

click Camera. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and double-click 01 Entry.rvt. expand Floor Plans. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A 3D view is created. click Training Files. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. expand Views (all). you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Courtyard View In this exercise. Creating a Solar Study . 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

9 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687.4 On the View toolbar. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. click Modify.Courtyard View. under Floor Plans. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. as shown. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. if necessary. double-click 01 Entry. you create a section cutaway view. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 6 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter Solar Study . 10 On the File menu. and click Rename. and click OK. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. click to reorient the view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.

to reorient the view. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . expand Sections. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click OK. right-click Section 1. and click Rename. click Section. click . and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Project Browser. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. 6 To view the section. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click 10 On the View toolbar.3 On the Design Bar.

as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 17 To hide the section box. 15 In the Rename View dialog.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. to expand the dialog. click Callout. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. including the house. as shown. then Fine. 16 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes. click Modify. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. right-click {3D}. double-click 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view. under 3D Views. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. then select Medium. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. do not display many elements in 3D.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Typical plan views. In some cases. 14 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. and under Orient to a View. and click Rename. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 18 On the File menu. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study.

select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 11 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Modify. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. as shown. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. under Floor Plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.4 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and under Orient to a View. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. click . to reorient the view. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 5 In the Project Browser. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . click 8 On the View toolbar. and click OK. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.

and click OK. under 3D Views. 20 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.15 Select the Roof. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 21 On the File menu. right-click {3D}. 17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . under 3D Views. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Save.

You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click . 10 Under Place. For this study. You can create a still. for City. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. expand Views (all). and time range. you specify the location. USA. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. Creating Solar Studies . 3 Select Cast Shadows. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. USA is selected. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date. leave the slider at 50. or multi-day solar study. select Los Angeles. and double-click Solar Study . 2 On the View Control Bar. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .Courtyard View. date range. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Click the Single-Day tab. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. expand 3D Views. click . and time.Boston. 9 In the Name dialog. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you specify the location. and click OK.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. single-day. CA. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. enter Summer Solstice. MA. For the Multi-Day solar study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Los Angeles. For the Single-Day solar study. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

Los Angeles. Under Frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click .Courtyard View is currently displayed. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. for Date. select June 22. . click . and click OK. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. enter Winter Solstice. 6 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. enter 20 and press ENTER. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 16 In the Name dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. Los Angeles is selected. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 14 In this case. select December 22.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click . 2006. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . click Save. and click Duplicate. Los Angeles. and click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. For Time Range. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. select Winter Solstice. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ For Time Interval. under Frame. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click OK. 2006. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Single-Day tab. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click To display the next key frame.

Click and enter Dining. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .■ To display the next sequential frame. Los Angeles. click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click Text. under Floor Plans. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click 01 Entry. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click . Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 14 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. and click OK. click To play the animation from start to finish. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. select Summer Solstice. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. . Click outside of the text box to end the command. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar.

Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 11 To display the section box. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Section Boxes. and click OK. click OK. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. select Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. click . click Lines.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. click . on the Single-Day tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. and click OK. On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views.

and enter 5 to 50. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 15 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Frame range.Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. Under Format.12 In the drawing area. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For Frames per second. On the Annotation Categories tab. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. For Save as type. if necessary. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. select the section box. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . To maintain the proportions of the frame. For Dimensions. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. as shown. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Under Output Length. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select AVI Files. 14 Click outside of the section box. enter 450 in the first field (width). Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For File name. for Model Graphics Style. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

and click OK. In this example. depending on the Frame Range. or frame. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select PNG. For Dimensions. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. or GIF. Los Angeles. select Winter Solstice. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. Under Output Length. To view the animation. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. For Save as type. 18 In the Save As dialog.Los Angeles. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 . enter 450 in the first field (width). and click OK. BMP.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. you open each image. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. 8 In the Save As dialog. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. for Model Graphics Style. select Frame range. For File name. For Frames per second. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Save. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. click Save. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. such as JPEG. 20 On the File menu. Under Format.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. verify that the value is set to 15. click Save. click OK. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. TIFF. or any single-frame format. on the Single-Day tab. and enter 5 to 10. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. of the animation separately. click . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. NOTE When you export to PNG. for Compressor. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.9 On the File menu. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 5 Select the roof. as shown. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and on the View Control Bar. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

click OK. for File name enter 2pm . On the Annotation Categories tab. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 On the File menu. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . In the Save As dialog. Click the Desktop icon. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . specify 2:00 pm. clear Section Boxes. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . select Full Frames (Uncompressed). click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Duplicate. 17 On the View Control Bar.Boston. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. USA. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and click Save. 8 On the View Control Bar. click the Multi-Day tab. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. MA.Los Angeles . and click OK. click Save. For Time Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. for Compressor. For Time. under Sun and Shadows Settings.Week Interval. select One week. and click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

select Summer Solstice. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. Then. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click OK. 9 Under Date and Time.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . 11 Under Date and Time. specify 11:00 AM for time. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click . 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. In this exercise. select Cast Shadows. click . Orienting to True North | 701 .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. and select Winter Solstice. click Apply. For example. on the Still tab. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Still tab.

and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. double-click 01 Entry. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. under Floor Plans. select True North. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . for Orientation. and select Winter Solstice. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Graphics. click the Still tab. click OK. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice that the project rotates in the view. and click OK. On the Options Bar. and select View Properties. click . in the Angle from Project to True North field. In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar.

19 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click Summer Solstice. are saved with the project. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. verify that AVI Files is selected. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Orienting to True North | 703 . and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For Save as type. under 3D Views. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. including the angle from True North. for File name. click OK. click . Los Angeles. In the Save As dialog. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Apply. 21 On the View Control Bar. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab.

you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and click OK. 28 Once you are finished with the study. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. for Compressor. and click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.■ Under Format. Click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. 2 In the Project Browser. and exporting it as a JPEG image. capturing it. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. enter 600 in the first field. double-click 01 Entry. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . In the Element Properties dialog. select Draft (75 dpi). Right-click in the drawing area. select Project North. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. under 3D Views. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. for Orientation. Since a rendered image is temporary. under Floor Plans. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. In this exercise. for Resolution. 29 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Raytrace. for Scene. under 3D Views. On the Options Bar. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. and select View Properties. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. click Save. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendered views do not have this limitation. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. click GO.

for Resolution. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. click Capture Rendering. and click Save.■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . select Presentation (300 dpi). click Export Image. In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Renderings. click Save. 7 Review some captured images of the building. select JPEG. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. click GO. for Save as Type. The scene is rendered in high resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. In the Save As dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

and details." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. sections. type. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. In this series of exercises. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. In this tutorial. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. Advanced Model Graphics. For the realistic approach. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design." In Revit MEP. elevations. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. length. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . Whether the audience is the general contractor. an outside reviewer. there are several options for expressing the architecture. you explore the stylistic approach. or the client. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. a consultant. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. and Section Boxes. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. To express texture beyond material specifics.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. the Linework Tool.

Using the pre-built building model. Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

expand Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . click Training Files. expand Views (all).Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 2nd Flr.rvt.

7 Under Visibility. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Visibility/Graphics. click Save As. Down Arrow. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. UP Text. exit the menu. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click in the drawing area. dimensions. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. sections. click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. and click OK. 10 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice that no annotations display in this view. expand the Stairs category.2 In the Project Browser. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear DOWN Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. this represents the view getting smaller. and click Rename. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. and so on in this view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. elevations. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Cnst. Up Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab.

select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Sun and Shadow Settings. and click Save. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. and click OK. Time and Place. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. the darker the shadows. 6 Under Settings. At that place. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Place tab. ■ Under Intensity. 5 Under Settings.11 In the Save As directory.rvt. specify 35 for Shadow. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. MA. The higher the number. click for Place. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. on the Still tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. modify. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 2 On the View Control Bar. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you can create.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 8 Select Boston. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . select By Date. navigate to the folder of your choice. Within a Project. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. Under Shadows Properties. USA for City. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display.

18 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click Save. click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon.NOTE For this step. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. clear Ground Plane at Level. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. 17 On the File menu. click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Settings. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select 1st Flr. be aware that if you enter a different city. and click OK. you can enter any city you wish. Cnst. click . 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. however. 11 Click OK. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose.

The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click View. and click to place it. click Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Arch Portrait. 6 On the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and notice a view title displays. and click OK. click Modify. click Add View.

714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under Graphics. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click . and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. and click Activate View. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For this analytique. enter Presentation. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 9 On the Options Bar.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. To accomplish this. click Edit/New. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Duplicate. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select No for Show Title.

click Filled Region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. If necessary. When you are finished drawing the chain. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and select Chain. click Edit/New. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Region Properties. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 .16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the boundary of the region. 25 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 17 In the Type Selector. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. for Fill Pattern. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . click Duplicate. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. fill properties. click . The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. select Invisible Lines. click . enter Solid Black.

32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click View Properties. select Solid Fill. click OK. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. under Identity Data. 34 On the File menu. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. scroll down. under Name. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.

right-click Copy of South. under Visibility. expand Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. clear Visible. on the Model Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 2 In the Project Browser. scroll up. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click South.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Visibility. 9 Click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. click in the Walls row. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. click Override. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the drawing area. under Elevations. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Views (all). and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. exit the menu. expand the Doors category. enter Presentation South Elevation. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides.

and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 16 In the Name dialog. select Cast Shadows. click Save. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 12 Under Shadow Properties. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 13 Under Intensity. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Time and Place. specify 35 for Shadow. click .Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. By changing the angle of the sun. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. under Settings. and click OK. click OK. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. select By Date. click Duplicate. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 20 On the File menu. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 . and click Add View to Sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. under Views (all). expand Sheets (all). and double-click A105 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Notice the viewport displays a view title. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation.rvt.

7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays. 720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation.

8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save.

this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rvt. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. expand Sections (Callout 1). Cnst. To accomplish this. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). click Section. 3 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below. Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1: 100 for Scale. Adjust the controls to modify the extents.

double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation Section 2. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 10 In the Project Browser. click Callout. and click OK. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Modify. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click OK. click Override. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1). click in the Walls row. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. select 1 : 100 for Scale.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab.

and click OK. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. clear Annotation Crop. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and clear Elevation Swing. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 22 On the Options Bar. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Extents.17 Under Visibility. clear Crop Region Visible. When you select the crop boundary. click . expand the Doors category. scroll up.

select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Under Shadows Properties. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. open the Project Browser and. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. In addition. under Sections (Callout 1). Under Intensity. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . Click Apply. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. click Save. double-click Presentation Section 2. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.24 On the File menu. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.

Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.In the steps that follow. click Duplicate. Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. was added to this dataset for training purposes. NOTE The line style. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. under Settings. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Directly. click . click Save. 11 On the File menu. under Silhouette Edges. select Relative to View. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. and click OK.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. under Sheets (all). select Section: Presentation Section 2. select Viewport: Presentation.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click to place the selected view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . 3 In the Views dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. The view title no longer displays.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.

you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. double-click Section 2. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To rotate an object. and press ENTER. click . Using a clock as a reference. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. you click to specify the start radius.

double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees. under Sheets (all). 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. and drag it up and to the left as shown.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 . Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.

4 In the View Templates dialog. enter Presentation. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 16 On the File menu.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.15 On the Design Bar. click OK. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Save. click Create View Template from View. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 In the New View Template dialog. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 2 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730.

click Apply View Template.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. 12 In the Views dialog. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. right-click Section 1. double-click A105 . 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and elevation swings no longer display. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. Notice the furniture. click Add View. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. select Section: Presentation Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. Now. select Viewport: Presentation. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. select Presentation. 16 On the View menu. click View Properties. annotations. lighting fixtures. 15 Right-click the viewport. under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing.Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . 9 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. 7 In the Rename View dialog.

you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. and click Deactivate View. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. click Save. 20 On the File menu. under Graphics. In this exercise. 18 Right-click the viewport. such as a tracery window or column capital.17 In the Element Properties dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732.

double-click Section 1.rvt. under Sections (Type 1). and click Rename. enter Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. and click OK. click Modify. 5 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. After you add the callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1).

clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Annotation Crop. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 8 Right-click. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click View Properties.

and click Add View to Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and move it into the position shown below. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. under Sheets (all). 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 . click View Properties. click Modify. select Section: Presentation Callout. select Viewport: Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 17 On the View menu. double-click A105 . and click Deactivate View. select Custom for View Scale. and click Activate View. and click OK.Presentation.

You do not have to replicate the image exactly. select Solid Black for Type. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. under Sections (Callout 1). 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. double-click Presentation Callout. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. In the steps that follow. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 23 On the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and make adjustments as necessary. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. When finished. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. activate the viewport. and click OK.

click . and click Activate View.Presentation. double-click A105 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. 29 On the Options Bar. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all). click Filled Region. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 .26 On the Project Browser.

click View Properties. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 31 On the View menu. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the crop region. click Finish Sketch. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

“Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. 37 On the File menu. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.34 On the View menu. and click Deactivate View. and apply shadows to the views. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Extents. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

3 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Orient ➤ Southwest. under 3D Views. Under Intensity. click . Under Shadows Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click 1 : 200. 2 On the View menu. click the Scale control. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. double-click Isometric. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

under 3D Views. under Silhouette Edges. 14 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. right-click Isometric. 15 In the Project Browser. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. 9 Click OK. and click Rename. right-click Isometric 1. under 3D Views. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. Cnst. and click OK. Select 1st Flr. select Section Box. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. in the list. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. Select Relative to View. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . double-click Isometric 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click View Properties. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Extents. under Settings. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. enter Isometric 1. and click Rename. 18 On the View menu. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Override Silhouettes.

When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. under 3D Views. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. right-click Isometric 2. make a duplicate of the view.20 Select the section box. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 22 In the Project Browser.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 . double-click Isometric 2. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. Notice the section box no longer displays. 34 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Section Boxes. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. Next. and click OK. under 3D Views. When you are finished. under 3D Views. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 26 To hide the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK.24 In the Rename View dialog. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click A105 . in the Type Selector. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click OK. 31 To hide the section box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views.Presentation. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 3. In such a case. select Viewport: Presentation. 29 Select the section box. enter Isometric 3. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. either adjust the plane location.

select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector.35 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. Notice the filled region partially covers the view.

47 On the Design Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 . This will make it easier to draw lines. 44 Using the drawing tools. 39 On the Design Bar. and then click Edit/New. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 38 Select the poche filled region. and click Deactivate View. and on the Options Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. 45 On the Design Bar. 42 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. click Finish Sketch. The image below shows the lines redrawn. select Solid Black for Type. 43 On the Design Bar. click Lines. select Concrete for Type. click Edit. select Transparent for Background. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view.

49 On the File menu. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. you create the final view for the analytique. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you add it to the presentation sheet.rvt. under Floor Plans. Cnst. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. then you specify the eye direction and range. a cutaway perspective view.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . Under Intensity. select Cast Shadows.The view opens immediately. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Shadows Properties. click . 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

A section box now cuts through the building model. click View Properties. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Extents. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Silhouette Edges. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. under Change. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 19 To hide the section box. you must specify the actual size of the image. 17 Under Model Crop Size.Presentation. Clear Crop Region Visible.14 Select the crop boundary. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 18 To hide the crop region. 21 In the Project Browser. After placing it. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. and click OK. double-click A105 . enter 165 mm for Width. clear Section Boxes. click Size. 15 On the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Sheets (all).

“Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. specify a text size of 6 mm. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click .22 On the File menu. click Duplicate. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Title. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Edit/New. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. under Text. enter Description. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Save. select Text : Title. select the same font as the title. under Text. 5 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 40 mm. select a font. click Duplicate. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog.

18 On the File menu. select Text : Description. 15 In the Type Selector.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Save. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

each with a different size. thus the term family.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. material set. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. 755 . Even though various types within a family can look completely different. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. shape. they are still related and come from a single source.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.

You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. For example. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . and roofs are examples of these types of families. has wall types that define interior. The basic walls system family. generic. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. for example. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. and roofs. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . but you cannot create new system families. and when and how to use it. foundation. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. exterior. while many more are stored in component libraries. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.rfa extension. In addition. Standalone families include columns. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. This makes file management much easier. Walls. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. In this lesson. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You also learn about the Family Editor. You can duplicate and modify existing system families.rfa extension. transfer them from one project to another. You can load them into projects. such as a dome roof. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . because there is only one file to track. trees. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Using the Family Editor. floors. and furniture. and partition wall styles. exceptions to this rule. floors. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. however. There are.

You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. you can drag it into the document window. such as plan. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. In this section. However. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. In the final exercise. if you change the original family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. and also a standalone furniture family component. you learn about the Family Editor. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. and when to use it. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Load Family command on the File menu. for example. how to access it. To add a family to your project. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. After the family has been loaded in the project. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. elevation. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. 2 On the File menu.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. You create in-place families only within the current project. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . 4 Select the family file name and click Open. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or 3D. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. it is saved with the project. custom wall treatments. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project.

presume it is a bay window that you require. consider checking the web library and other web resources. and click Open. 5 Finally. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. such as newsgroups. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 9 Save the newly-defined family. you learn when to use the Family Editor. Within the Windows® environment. To start a new family. open it in the Family Editor. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. select the appropriate template. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. and click Open. it should be available within the Type Selector. you can click File ➤ Open. how to access it. you can double-click any file with an . 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. navigate to a family file. it opens within the Family Editor. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.In this exercise. In this case. 3 Next. and then load it into the project.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. If you find a close match. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. if you have exhausted your external resources. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. When the family opens. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. With Revit MEP open. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. modify it as needed. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it.

you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. Using the installed templates. You create a furniture family. a lighting fixture. you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. not within the Family Editor. you create an in-place family. and several annotation families. In each lesson. When you create an in-place family. In addition. you learn how to create a different type of component.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you create it within the project file. 759 .

The door type has a variable height and width. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. height. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. and thickness.Creating a Door Family In this lesson.

click Training Files.rft. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. click Symbolic Lines. Labelled dimensions. and represent the door opening profile. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. click . Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click New ➤ Family.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu. select Doors [projection]. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 6 Maximize the window. 10 On the Options Bar. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Floor Plan: Ref. are also displayed. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. Notice the four tiled views. part of the door properties. 5 On the Window menu. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . click Tile.

click Dimension. 762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.

click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 19 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. select Width for Label.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.

you first specify the arc center. 22 In the Type selector. as shown. In the image below. click . 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. and select the command from the menu. When drawing an arc from center and end points. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 21 On the Design Bar. 24 Enter SI. click the down arrow button. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. along with the witness line controls. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. select Plan Swing [cut]. click Symbolic Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point.

click Lines. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 1 In the Project Browser.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. and click . 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765.

click Finish Sketch. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Left.8 On the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . then click to specify the dimension witness line. 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion.

under Floor Plans. click Modify and select the dimension.12 On the Design Bar. 19 Under Detail Levels. select Thickness for Label. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. verify that Coarse. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Left/Right. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Front/Back. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . and clear Plan/RCP. Level. 14 In the Project Browser. and Fine are selected. click Visibility. under View Specific Display. 17 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. Medium. and When cut in Plan/RCP. and click OK.

9 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 13 On the Design Bar. click . select Oak Door for Name. for Material. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . you assign a material to the door leaf. 4 In the Materials dialog box. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. under AccuRender. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion.Red/Stained.20 On the Options Bar. click for Texture. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click Modify.No Gloss. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Materials. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. 6 Click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. It also defines its appearance when rendered. and click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click OK. click . under Name. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Oak Door for Name. select Oak Door. and click OK. and click OK. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. for Material. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click OK.Dark. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. select Panel for Subcategory. click OK.

Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 . and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. double-click View 1.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. under Views (all). 22 Zoom in on a door corner. under 3D Views. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. 21 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. Under Other. Click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog box. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Click Apply. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. enter 2500 mm for Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. click Family Types. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. enter 2000 mm for Height. 24 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. In the Family Types dialog box. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Family Types. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 27 Click OK. By flexing the new component. click New. under Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 75 mm for Frame Width.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Enter 1000 mm for Width.

click Door. Enter 750 mm for Width. 12 On the File menu. Defining New Door Types | 771 . click Save. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. 8 Under Family Types. Define the second new door type. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Click Apply. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.4 In the Family Types dialog box. 19 On the Options Bar. Enter 925 mm for Width. and click OK. click New.rfa. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 17 Under Create new. click Load. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 6 In the Name dialog box.rfa. and click OK. 11 Click OK. enter 2134 mm for Height. Training Door. click Wall. click New ➤ Project. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. under Template file. Training Door. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rte. enter 2000 mm for Height. 5 Under Family Types. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. select Project. click Training Files. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Open. Define the third new door type. Click Apply. 20 In the Open dialog box. select it. click New. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. Click Apply. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. enter 2100 mm for Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

and select Shading with Edges. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 25 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.23 On the View toolbar. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Type Selector. click Door. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click . 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.

You create the window frame. height. default sill height. 32 You can close all files without saving. and specify values for the window width. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. and create the window sash as a sweep. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. Creating a Door Family.30 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Finally. Creating a Window Family | 773 . and mullion offset. This completes the lesson. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. part of the window properties. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. is one of the type parameters. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. Labelled dimensions. The window type has a variable height and width. click New ➤ Family. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. also one of the window properties. 2 On the File menu. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 4 On the Window menu. Height and Default Sill Height. 7 Enter ZF. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. click Training Files.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. click Tile. you specify the parameters for the new window family. 5 On the View menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. equally spaced vertical mullions. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. The label name. Four views are tiled on your display. When you add labels to dimensions. are also displayed.rft.

then sketching the sweep profile.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. This process is called “flexing the model. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. and click Apply. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Change the height and width values again. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click Apply. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Family Types. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1300 mm for Height. 12 Click OK. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . This is the starting point for the new window. Enter 1800 mm for Width.

click . 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 4 On the Options Bar. and select 1:10. click Finish Path. Snap the cursor to each corner. 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open View. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. click Sketch Profile. click the Scale control. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. click Lines. select Elevation: Right.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 2 On the Design Bar.

11 On the Design Bar. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. click Modify. click Dimension. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . and select the dimension. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. select Prefer: Wall faces. click . and specify an offset of 50 mm. 12 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 14 On the Design Bar.

sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. However. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click . Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. the exact dimensions are not critical. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 24 Below the red dot. click Modify. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. and select the reference plane. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 20 On the Options Bar. enter Sash for the Name. click Lines. select Chain and click . under Identity Data. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar.

28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays.26 Select the right edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 . When the lock displays. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. click Dimension. select the line you want to move. as shown.29 On the Design Bar. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP After adding the dimension. Modify each dimension if necessary. and specify the dimension value. click Modify.

32 Select the 20 mm dimension. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . expand 3D Views. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. click the lock to constrain the present value. and double-click View 1. 35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. zoom out until it displays. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. When the lock displays. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 37 In the Project Browser. Next. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Tools toolbar. If necessary. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. click . under Views (all). 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot.

and select Lock. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. and click OK. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. click Set Work Plane. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Exterior.38 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and select the option. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box.45 mm for Depth.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 9 On the Design Bar. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.50 mm for Offset. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ Enter . and lock icons display on each line. ■ Click . set the following options: Click .

784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.10 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise.

as shown. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click . 2 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. double-click Right. under Elevations. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click Ref Plane.

8 Select the reference plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. and click OK. and click to create the glass boundary. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Lock. and click OK. click . 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. click . 16 On the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 15 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Modify. enter -12 mm for Depth.

double-click Right. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . and glass 19 In the Project Browser. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 23 On the Design Bar. View the window model with frame. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. click . sash. under Elevations. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. and click OK.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Select the glass extrusion. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. After the family is loaded into a project.

You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected.24 In the Project Browser. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For example. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Under Other. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. click Family Types. double-click View 1.

the exact location is not critical.27 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. Click OK. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . double-click Exterior. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. under Elevations. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Click Apply.

790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. click Dimension. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. After adding the dimension. as shown. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.4 On the Design Bar.

TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.. select Family parameter. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Under Group parameter under.. select <Add parameter. and click OK. click Family Types. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click Modify. under Dimensions. Click OK. Select Instance. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 .> for Label. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Dimensions.

15 On the Design Bar. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Modify. As you did before. move the dimension value as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mullion Offset for Label. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 20 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the dimension value.

click Dimension. After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. and click . 23 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 22 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. However. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. enter 14 mm for Depth. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. click Lines. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.

Select Type. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Group parameter under. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select <Add parameter> for Label. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. select Family parameter.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. select Dimensions. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. 29 On the Design Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown.

Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Remember. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar. Select the dimension. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. select Mullion Width for Label.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. This is changed in later steps. and on the Options Bar.

Click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Under Other. click Family Types. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. enter 1500 mm for Height. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply.

Click OK. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 39 On the Design Bar. evenly spaced. enter 1000 mm for Height. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Enter 2000 mm for Width. click Lines. Click Apply. 41 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. and aligned with the sash edge. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. In this case.NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. or undoing the same. click Set Work Plane. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.

50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 46 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. Remember. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 48 On the Design Bar. as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.44 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. click Dimension. click Dimension. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. click Modify. Move the dimension value as shown.

and select the vertical mullions. Select the dimension. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. click Finish Sketch.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Mullion Width for Label. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . click Join Geometry. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. 53 Select the horizontal mullions.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. you can still see the window. 56 On the Design Bar.54 In the Project Browser. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. click Family Types. If necessary. Under Other. under 3D Views. Click Apply. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height. double-click View 1. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.

59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. Enter 2000 mm for Width. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.58 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . Under Other. sash. Click OK. you assign materials to the frame. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height.

click OK. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Medium. enter Pine Frame for Name. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. select Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. click Duplicate. No Gloss. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Materials dialog box. clear the other view options. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and click OK. click for Material. Yellow/. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Identity Data. 8 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. click Materials. double-click Exterior. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Edit for Visibility. and select Shading with Edges. 3 In the New Material dialog box. verify that Coarse. sash. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and the mullions. Dark. select Stained.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 16 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 18 On the Design Bar. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. and Fine are selected. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. the sash. click for Texture. under View Specific Display. 13 In the Materials dialog box. under Graphics. 10 On the Options Bar. under AccuRender. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 9 Select the window frame sweep. click OK. 2 In the Materials dialog box.

verify that Coarse. 23 Under Detail Levels.Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Visibility. Medium. double-click Right. double-click View 1. under View Specific Display. and click OK. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. 21 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 .

and glass display their assigned materials. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. sash. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.The window frame. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. mullions.

Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. and click OK. The window height is doubled. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 7 In the Name dialog box. In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. click Family Types. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Height. under Family Types. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. and click Apply. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. enter 1000 mm for Height. Defining New Window Types | 805 .Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and click Apply.

Training Window. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. 20 In the Open dialog box. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click Save. 13 In the Name dialog box. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 19 On the Options Bar. and click Open. select it. 14 In the Family Types dialog box.rfa.rfa file. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. and click OK. Click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click New. Enter 1300 mm for Height. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New. click Load. Click Apply. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click Window. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. 15 On the File menu. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Click Apply. click to start a new project based on your default template.9 Under Family Types. 10 In the Name dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width.

30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 32 On the View menu. and select Shading with Edges. 27 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. 35 On the View Control Bar.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 23 On the Design Bar. click . 29 In the Type Selector. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. Defining New Window Types | 807 . click Window. click Modify. click Thin Lines. 34 On the View toolbar. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click Wall. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 33 Zoom in on the center window. clear Tag on Placement.

You begin by creating the desktop. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. drawer base. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. and specify values for the furniture length and depth.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. rolltop. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. Finally. and drawers as extrusions.

Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Training Files. 2 On the File menu. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 4 Maximize the view. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Level. 5 On the View menu. click Ref Plane.rft. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. their exact location is not critical. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.

Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. click Dimension. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. and ending at the right reference plane.

Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.12 On the Design Bar. and ending at the lower reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. click Modify. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 13 Select the left reference plane. 15 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 19 Select the upper. horizontal reference plane.17 To the right of the dimension you just created.

select Family parameter.21 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 24 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. TIP To do this. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. click Modify. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Afterwards.. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Under Parameter Data..> for Label. Select Type. enter Length for Name. Click OK. For Group parameter under.

enter Depth for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK..> for Label. For Group parameter under. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Select Type.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Therefore. Under Parameter Data. you can still see the model. select Dimensions. click Family Types. 27 On the Options Bar.. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Enter 1000 mm for Depth.31 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE In the image below. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 2 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. Click OK. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. enter 2000 mm for Length. Your lines may have a lighter weight. click . enter 3000 mm for Length. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. it will also adapt to the same changes. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. click Symbolic Lines.

6 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Elevations. and enter 100 mm for Depth. double-click Front. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. and click to select all four symbolic lines. click Finish Sketch. Level for Name. 11 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 5 On the Design Bar. click . select Level: Ref. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the top edge. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. 7 On the Design Bar.4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Set Work Plane.

as shown.. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.> for Label. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. select <Add parameter. and select the bottom edge. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. click Dimension. select Family parameter. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. click Modify.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. enter Height for Name. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. 22 On the Options Bar.

31 In the Family Types dialog box. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. For Group parameter under. Click OK. select <Add parameter.. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. you can still see the model. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Modify. and click Apply. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. select Dimensions. Click Apply. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. click Family Types. 25 On the Options Bar. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. enter Thickness for Name. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. select Family parameter. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.> for Label. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area.. 29 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions.

3 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click . click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Level. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 . double-click Ref. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. and enter 100 mm for Offset. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right.

click Set Work Plane. 13 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. click Lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. and click OK.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. Click the lock icon as shown. Lock the dimension as shown. Level for Name.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 . 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. two lock icons display.After you complete the rectangle. 16 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.

as shown below at the cursor. 822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 19 Select the four sketched lines. click the Mirror tool. . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain. using the TAB key. 23 For the align-to reference. click . click Modify.Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 20 On the Tools toolbar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 22 On the Tools toolbar.

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 . 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. A lock icon displays. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

enter Drawer Base Width for Name. Under Parameter Data.. as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 Add two final dimensions. Select Type.. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. For Group parameter under. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. select <Add parameter.> for Label. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK.■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. select Dimensions. select Family parameter.

35 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 . 34 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. double-click Front. 33 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. click Modify.

41 On the View toolbar. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click the Scale control and select 1:20. After the alignment. 45 On the View Control Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click Modify. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. notice that annotations display in this view. click .37 On the Tools toolbar. a lock icon displays. 42 On the View menu. click it to lock the alignment. click Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click . 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . However. and click OK.

return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. 47 On the Design Bar. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. you can still see the model. 50 Proceed to the next exercise.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1200 mm for Height. and click Apply. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . Click Apply. Enter 150 mm for Thickness.

click Set Work Plane. under Elevations. click Lines. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. and click OK. click . 5 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. double-click Right. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the upper left corner. 6 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 2 On the Design Bar. as shown.

then select the right parallel sketch line. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock the alignment.8 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 . 9 Select the desk top. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click .

click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. click the Fillet arc tool. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. the upper sketch line. and lock it. . 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and lock it. click Lines.11 On the Design Bar.

and click the lock icon. and click the lock icon. select the left edge of the rolltop. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. double-click Front. 18 On the Tools toolbar. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . select the right edge of the rolltop.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. click .

you can still see the model.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Height. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click . If not. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

3 In the Work Plane dialog box.25 In the Family Types dialog box. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click OK. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Click OK.

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Multiple Alignment. under Elevations. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. . 6 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click . 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. 11 On the Tools toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important.5 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. Lock each dimension as you add it. click Dimension. click drawer set on the left. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. There should be four dimensions as shown. click . If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. double-click Front. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 14 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. zoom the view until you do.

under Constraints. click for Texture. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . 28 Click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 In the New Material dialog box. Polished. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click Modify. click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. enter Desk . and select Shading with Edges. and click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Finish Sketch. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. 31 On the View Control Bar. under Materials and Finishes. Dark. Cherry. 19 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. 20 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. under AccuRender. click . enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click .Wood. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. click Extrusion Properties. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. click Duplicate. click . for Material. click OK.15 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. and click Apply. 33 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 4000 mm for Length. click Family Types. and click Apply. Click Apply. If not. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You can also use dimension constraints.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. you can still see the model. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. and click Apply.

Training Furniture. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. and click Open. click Load. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. and click OK. click Apply. click Family Types. 19 In the Type Selector. click . 17 On the Options Bar. click Save.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 15 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. and click Apply. and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. and click OK.rfa file. select it. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. 3 In the Name dialog box. to start a new project based on your default template. 9 In the Name dialog box. 18 In the Open dialog box. click New. 8 Under Family Types. click New. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 11 On the File menu. click 14 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click New. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 6 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. and click Apply. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . 5 Under Family Types. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family.

This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. 23 In the Type Selector. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. and add the second desk. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk.21 In the Type Selector. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. and click to add the third desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

click Finish Sketch. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Level. and double-click Ref. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 9 On the Design Bar. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click New ➤ Family. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser.rft. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select Ref. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. and click Open. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. Select Metric Baluster. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. their exact location is not critical. 7 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Level for Name. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). However.

click . Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. click Modify and select the extrusion.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. By default. 4 On the Design Bar. click the Modelling tab. click OK. Select the DefaultMetric. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. and click Open. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 On the Design Bar. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. The new custom baluster is now complete. click Finish Sketch. click Browse. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa. 14 Click the lock icon.rte file. select Training Files. In the New Project Dialog box. click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click New ➤ Project.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Open.rfa file. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click Shading with Edges. 9 On the View toolbar. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK. click . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select it. click OK.7 On the File menu. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 8 In the Open dialog box. under Baluster Family. click . 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 11 On the View menu. click Modify and select the existing railing. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Edit/New.

you draw a sweep profile. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. a reveal.rfa.rft. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. The new sweep profile is now complete. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. a stair nosing. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. However. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. Select Metric Profile. a railing. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. cornices. balusters. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. and a host sweep. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. you create five different profiles: a sweep. In this lesson. select Training Files. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New ➤ Family.Sweep.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. and click Open. their exact location is not critical. click Lines. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. soffits. you create a rail profile. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. In the left pane of the New dialog box. and other sweep-defined objects. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise.

and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rft. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 . Dataset ■ On the File menu. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . under Floor Plans.Rail. their exact location is not critical. click New ➤ Family. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rfa. and click Open. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. The new rail profile is now complete. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Level is open. select Training Files. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. you create a stair nosing profile. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. However. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. verify that Ref.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser.

click Lines. In addition.Stair Nosing. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. verify that Ref. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rfa. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. and click Open. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. select Training Files. select Training Files. However. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a reveal profile. and click Open. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Level is open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. under Floor Plans. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise.rft. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. their exact location is not critical. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.rft. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog box.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). and click Open. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. their exact location is not critical. The new reveal profile is now complete. Select Metric Profile-Hosted. which may be any vertical surface. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . However. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.Reveal. select Training Files. click Lines. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. In the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa. click New ➤ Family. under Floor Plans. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. verify that Ref. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Level is open. you create a host sweep profile.

In the New Project Dialog box. 846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. click OK.rfa. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. their exact location is not critical. click Browse. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click Lines.rte file. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. and click Open. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Create. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. However. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.Host Sweep. Select the DefaultMetric. The new host sweep profile is now complete. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click New ➤ Project.

13 On the Design Bar.Sweep. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. expand Elevations. click Sketch 2D Path. select Profile . click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. 7 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. click Load Profiles. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. click Finish Family. the exact location of the path is not critical. and click Open. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Sweep for Name. 15 On the View toolbar. click . and double-click South. select it. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.Sweep. beside Load Profiles. expand Views (all). 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. navigate to the location of Profile . and click OK. select Generic Models for Family Category. 11 In the Open dialog box. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 .4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Finish Sweep. 9 On the Design Bar. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

on the Options Bar. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ . click Wall. select Profile Is Flipped. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and click Open. The sweep profile application is now complete. 20 Select the sweep profile and. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Family. click Ref Plane. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click New ➤ Project. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. select Training Files. on the Options Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. click OK.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar.rte file. 23 Click OK. click Browse. Under Other. Select the DefaultMetric. Under Constraints. 2 In the New Project dialog box.

6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Horizontal is selected. click . their exact location is not critical.NOTE When you draw the walls. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 5 On the View toolbar. 4 Draw four walls as shown. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 .

you specify the room tag parameters. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box.Host Sweep. under Construction. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 12 In the Open dialog box.10 On the Design Bar. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. Select M_Room Tag. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. navigate to the location of Profile .Host Sweep for Profile. select it. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.rft. 17 On the View toolbar.rfa. and click Open. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. click Edit/New. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and area with labels added to extract project data. and click OK. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Training Files. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify.Host Sweep : Profile . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a room tag which displays room name. floor and ceiling finish. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. select Profile . 13 Select the wall sweep and. click Spin [Shift]. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. click . . and click Open.

23 In the Select Parameter dialog box.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Label : 2mm. 13 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. enter 2mm for Name. and click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. click Label. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Area. and click OK. clear Underline. 16 Zoom in on the label. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. and click OK. 17 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. and click OK. select Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Floor Finish. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Label. select Underline. select Ceiling Finish. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. and click OK. click OK. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Selector.

This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rft. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click Open.rfa. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. select Training Files. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. click . Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. The new room tag is now ready for use. 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. Select Generic Annotation. notice that there is only one view available. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.

enter North Line for Name. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. and select the upper vertical line. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. select 3 for Line Weight. click New.10 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. select North Line. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Training North Arrow. in the North Line row. click Modify. click Modify.rfa. 17 On the Design Bar. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. and click OK. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 16 In the Type Selector. under Modify Subcategories. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of.

4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select A1 metric. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and labels.rfa.rte file. click Sheet. text. 12 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. Dataset ■ On the File menu. and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box. and your project data. select it. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. click New ➤ Titleblock. select Training Files. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. graphics. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. 5 Click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. The titleblock has linework. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. click Browse. and click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the New Project dialog box. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. 8 In the Open dialog box. select Training North Arrow. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. Select the DefaultMetric. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. click OK. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. click New ➤ Project. 7 On the File menu. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu.

and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and click Open. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Select A0 metric. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar.rft. . Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. and enter 140 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. click . and enter -25 for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar. and click .

and enter 20 for Offset. click Modify. press CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line.11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. select Title Blocks. 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. enter 30 for Offset. click . 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Wide Lines. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 . and select the second and third horizontal lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.

25 On the Design Bar. click Modify.jpg. 2 In the Open dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Zoom in on the logo. select Company Logo. The titleblock linework is now complete. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. navigate to Training Files/Common. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. text notes. and labels to your titleblock. and click Open. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you add a company logo. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.

click Text. and click OK. click . select Text : 8mm. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text.Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. in the text box. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and add an address and phone number as shown. under Text. 9 In the Name dialog box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . 11 Click OK twice. enter 10 for Text Size. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. and select Bold.

18 Select the drag handle. and select the consultant text note. address. Add consultant name.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and select the last text note. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Modify. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. and drag the text note down as shown.

click . 24 On the Options Bar.23 On the Edit toolbar. select Constrain and Multiple. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 . 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

and enter Drawn By:. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Text. and enter Sheet Number:. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 34 Click OK twice. 32 In the Name dialog box. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Duplicate. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Text. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Checked By:. and enter Date:. enter 5 for Text Size. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 5mm for Name. click Edit/New. select Text : 5mm.

43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 . select Project Issue Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. click Label. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and click to specify the label location.

click Label. and click to specify the label location. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 50 On the Options Bar. select Checked By and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 15 for Text Size. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 55 Click OK twice. select Project Number. click Edit/New. and click OK. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 15mm Label for Name. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click Center and Middle. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click . Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 53 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. select Sheet Number. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Drawn By. and click to specify the label location. under Text. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

select Client Name. click Label. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and click OK.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location.

select it. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click Edit/New. 2 In the New Project dialog box. select 4mm Label. click OK. and click OK. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 7 Click OK. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click Browse. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. and click Open. 75 Click OK twice. select Training Files. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.70 On the Options Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. 73 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Open dialog box. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 80 On the Design Bar. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. enter 4 for Text Size. click Load.rte file. click Left and Middle. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Text. and click Open. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. click New ➤ Project. The titleblock graphics. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate. 77 On the Options Bar. text. In the New Project Dialog box. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click Sheet. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. select File Path. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4mm Label.rfa. click . and click to specify the label location. and labels are now complete.rfa file. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

under Other. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter In Progress for Project Status. Enter Office Building for Project Name. 9 On the Options Bar. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Project Information. 14 Click OK. click Modify and select the titleblock.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. and click OK. enter Name for Drawn By. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . 2005 for Project Issue Date. 12 On the Settings menu.

868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rvt. click Open. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. and click Open. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. and set the suffix to None. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Orient ➤ Southeast. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Select c_Pantheon. To change the units of measurement to meters. Set the Length units to millimeters. on the Settings menu. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. set the Area to Square meters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. select Training and navigate to the Common folder.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. click Project Units.

select Section: Wall Section . and click OK. click Create.Center. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. and click OK. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and double-click South. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. enter Dome for Name. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser.Next. expand Views (all). and click Open View. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. select Pick a Plane. select Roofs for Family Category. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 .

click . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 12 On the Options Bar. click Axis. 15 On the Options Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar.The center wall section view is displayed.

and select Chain. click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.17 Move the cursor out. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 .

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click . 27 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar.

click and select Chain. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . click . click Lines. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown.

41 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. and click OK. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click . click Finish Sketch. select Concrete . The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 40 On the Design Bar. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. 38 In the Materials dialog box.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click Create. click Finish Family. click Revolution Properties. The dome roof closed profile is now complete.35 Select the interior face of the wall. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click for Material. under Materials and Finishes. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. 42 On the View toolbar.

click . double-click South.Center. select Section: Wall Section . 9 In the Go To View dialog box. and click OK. click Axis. click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. select Pick a Plane. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 11 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . select Floors for Family Category. enter Concave Floor for Name. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar.

click Lines. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the axis. and select Chain. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 14 On the Options Bar. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. click .O. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.

Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Cobblestone for Name. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click for Material.18 Specify the intersection of the T. click OK. and click OK. click Finish Family.O. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.O. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Revolution Properties. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 24 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D Section View. 25 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click Finish Sketch.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

not specifically how to make a floor truss. formula-based parameters. 879 . In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. you will understand the process.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. During this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. In exercises that become increasingly complex. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. methodology. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. and detail level controls. In this case. assigned subcatecories. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. At the end of this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types.

This decision dictates which family template you begin with. NOTE When creating a new family. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. and structural walls. In addition. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Two types should be created. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. and also works intuitively with them. In this lesson. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Take this into consideration during your design planning. you determine the requirements of the new component. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Although this solution is possible. a generic floor-based component might work. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. beams. you should avoid over-designing the component. For every complexity added to a family. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . this must be a structural beam component. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. It should also be an available option within a beam system. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. it is not the best solution. For training purposes.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. In this case. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. In this case. In the next exercise. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be.

These materials can be applied using Object Styles.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. 4 Continue with the next exercise. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. In addition. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. Depending on the family you are designing. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. such as wood type. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. would require Instance or Type parameters. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. Selecting the Family Template | 881 .

this is where you access family templates. However. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. 6 In the New dialog box. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. Like most generic family templates. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Usually. and open Metric\Templates. In addition.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. On the right side of the New dialog box. Select it so that the preview displays. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. click Training Files. you will access them from the Training Files folder. for example: wall based or floor based. 4 Scroll through the various template options. notice the preview. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Beams and Braces. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft. There are two structural framing templates provided. scroll to the structural framing templates.

Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.rft to open it.Complex and Trusses.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Floor Plan: Ref. 10 Maximize the view. and notice the preview. Because of its simplicity. Floor Plan: Ref.rft and notice the preview.Beams and Braces. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 . Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.Complex and Trusses. spacing. ■ Metric Structural Framing . This template is the best starting point for the new family.rft. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Level. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components.Beams and Braces. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . and display functions required by structural beams.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.

When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. lines. Reference Plane: Left. however. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Level. Therefore. Like many templates. under 3D Views. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. you add the reference planes. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.In this view. double-click Ref. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884. 11 In the Project Browser. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. 12 In the Project Browser. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. under Floor Plans. double-click Front. double-click View 1. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. under Elevations. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. you add reference planes to the beam design.

two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. In the project plan view image below. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. In the image below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. notice the location of the beam extents. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 .

it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. click Ref Plane. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. click . In a later exercise. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Before adding new reference planes. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam.Add ref. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. click Ref Plane. Level. and select the Level: Ref. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. Level as the mirror axis. 14 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 13 On the Design Bar. click to place it. 10 On the Design Bar. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. double-click Front. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. Adding Reference Planes | 887 . TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. select the lower horizontal reference plane. To do this. click on the Edit toolbar. Level. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click .

specify an Offset of 200 mm. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it.

which you do in the next exercise. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. double-click Ref. under Floor Plans.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Adding Reference Planes | 889 . specify an Offset of 238 mm. Level. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. and click Save. click . separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. navigate to the folder of your choice. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Make sure you remember where you saved it. click Dimension. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 2 On the Options Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. click Modify. Wood Floor Truss.rfa.25 On the Design Bar. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 27 In the Save As dialog box.

and click the EQ symbol when it displays. double-click Front. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. under Elevations. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. the Center reference plane. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar.

place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Level. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. 892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously.

they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Throughout the tutorial.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. In the next exercise. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. In addition. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you will add additional reference planes. dimensions. add two dimensions as shown. and constraints as needed. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894.

Level. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. Under Parameter Data. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. it becomes a parameter. select Add parameter for Label. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. consider making it a type parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. ■ Click OK. If the component has material that varies per component. double-click Ref. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.rfa. Wood Floor Truss. select Family parameter. 3 On the Options Bar. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. under Floor Plans. Select Type. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. consider making it an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. In this exercise. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. enter Chord Width for Name. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. When you design a new family. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset.

Select Type. Click OK. under Elevations. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . Click OK. double-click Front. Under Parameter Data. Under Parameter Data. enter Center Chase Width for Name. enter Depth for Name. 7 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Add parameter for Label. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.

16 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Chord Thickness for Label. select Add parameter for Label. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. Select Type. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Under Parameter Data.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. 13 On the Options Bar. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter.

Flexing the Component Model | 897 . click Save. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. Dimensions. 20 On the File menu. In the Family Types dialog box. This is not limited to length parameters. click Family Types. If you add a new material parameter. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. 18 On the Design Bar. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. When you load this family into a project.17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. 19 Click Cancel.

you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. In this exercise. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. you can drag it to the opposing corner. Nesting a component. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you open the Family Types dialog box. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. click Family Types. When you flex a family. When you open the Family Types dialog. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box.rfa. Wood Floor Truss. under Dimensions. enter 600 mm for Depth. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. After you verify this.

Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. and click Apply. Click OK. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Click Apply. In addition. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . Level. 800 mm for Center Chase Width.

under Elevations.When working within the Family Editor. After creating the extrusions. Wood Floor Truss. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 6 On the File menu. you align and lock their position. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and select Lock. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Left. 3 On the Design Bar. click . 5 On the Design Bar.rfa. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After adding the chords. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. and click OK. 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Lines. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. After flexing the design. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. click Name.

10 On the Design Bar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . 8 On the Tools toolbar. the lines will no longer overlap. click the part of the line you want to keep. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. When using the Trim tool. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. and verify that Lock is selected. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating Solid Extrusions | 901 .Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. click . click Lines. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines.

902 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 902. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the